JP2019213935A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises an operation unit operable by a player, and is capable of executing a performance based on the operation on the operating unit concerned. When the operation frequency of the operation unit becomes predetermined operation frequency by carrying out repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined performance, it is possible to report winning in a specific lottery. A plurality of operation frequencies are set up as the predetermined operation frequency.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is awarded to a starting port (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like can be performed.

JP-A-2006-202930 JP-A-2006-198339 JP-A-2006-182376

  However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and has as its object to improve the interest of a game.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section show a correspondence relationship with an embodiment described later in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine according to application example 1,
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined operation times,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
If there is no notification of the winning even when the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, a loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 3, wherein
During the predetermined effect, does not perform a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 3, wherein
During the predetermined effect, there may be a case where a promotion effect for prompting the operation of the operation unit is performed, and a case where the promotion effect is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application Example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 5, wherein
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing the details of the second big winning device. It is an enlarged view of indicators. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table and the like. It is a 1st figure for demonstrating a hit type determination table. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating a hit type determination table. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern judgment table. It is a figure for explaining a normal symbol hit judgment table etc. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for explaining a special winning opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. 9 is a flowchart of a main timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol change processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a figure for explaining a setting table of a time saving counter. It is a 1st flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect ending process. It is a flowchart of an ending effect pattern determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a mode status setting table. It is a figure for explaining a time reduction production scenario decision table. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of a time reduction production scenario. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the expected production of V. It is an explanatory view exemplifying a winning game effect at the time of winning the special figure 2. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the fluctuation effect at the time of special figure 2 lottery. It is an explanatory view illustrating a countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated one production of crying. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the moving direction of the 1st movable part 14 in the advance direction. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable part 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination effect of the 1st movable role object 14 and an image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the rotating operation | movement of the 1st movable role. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first light emitting mode of a first movable role object. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating a second light emitting mode of a first movable role object. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable part 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the rotation operation | movement of the 2nd movable part 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination effect of the 1st, 2nd movable role. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination effect of the 1st, 2nd movable role. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated fluctuation | variation timing change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated fluctuation | variation timing change production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated fluctuation | variation timing change production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated symbol direction change production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated symbol direction change production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated symbol direction change production C. It is an explanatory view illustrating an example of the accessory design coordination effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the official goods symbol cooperation effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the official figure design cooperation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated specific image symbol cooperation production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated specific image symbol cooperation production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated specific image symbol cooperation production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated decorative pattern aspect change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated decorative pattern aspect change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated decorative pattern aspect change production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design fluctuation area effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design fluctuation area effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design fluctuation area effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation promotion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation promotion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation promotion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated this omission announcement production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated this omission announcement production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated this omission notification production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation part image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation part image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation part image display effect C. It is the explanatory view which illustrated appearance disappearance production A of the production button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated appearance disappearance effect B of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated appearance disappearance effect C of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated winning information production A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a winning notification effect B. It is an explanatory view illustrating a winning notification effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outline inside and outside effect A of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outline inside and outside effect B of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outline inside and outside effect C of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated selection display prevention effect A of an effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated selection display prevention effect B of an effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated selection display prevention effect C of an effect mode. It is an explanatory view illustrating a game ball image effect A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a game ball image effect B. It is an explanatory view illustrating a game ball image effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end surface effect A of the three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end surface effect B of the three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end surface effect C of the three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated union effect A of a movable character. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated union effect B of a movable character. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated union effect C of a movable character.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the details of the second big winning device 36. Hereinafter, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction seen from a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires a game ball based on a shooting operation of a player and, when the game ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is mounted inside the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at a lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hit ball feeding tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball feeding tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed along with the progress of the game. The sword member 64 is an operation unit imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by a player at the time of an effect performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button 65 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect performed along with the progress of the game. You. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to execute two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform a sound effect during a game or the like.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, rail members 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and the like. , A fixed winning device (navel) 19, an ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a first gate (through chucker) 28, a second gate (through chucker) 29, and a first big winning device (first attacker) ) 31, a second big prize device (second attacker) 36, a general prize port (normal prize port) 27, an out port 16, and a display device 40.

  The game area 3 is an area in which game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls protrude. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball fired by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is also provided inside each of the first panel movable body 14 and the second panel movable body 15, and the first panel movable body 14 and the second panel movable body 15 are provided. Is configured to be able to produce light emission in a specific mode.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a reserved digest image display area in which the reserved digest image 9C is displayed. The reservation images 9A and 9B are images representing reservation and are also referred to as reservation icons. The reservation digest image 9C is an image representing the reservation, and is also referred to as the reservation icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol 8L is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol 8C is displayed. The right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The fluctuation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the fluctuation display of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is configured to display a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by combining the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (small jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  For example, when a jackpot is won, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a slot such as “777”. In the case of a loss, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a break such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot / small lottery result using the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. Note that the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. In addition, the manner in which the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be an aspect in which scrolling is performed in the up-down direction, or other aspects. Further, when a small hit is won, the effect design may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as “135”, or the effect design may be stopped and displayed at a random angle. What combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as “fluctuation effect of the effect symbol” or simply “fluctuation effect” and “variation display”. In addition, in the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the final stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one-cycle variation effect). . Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the final stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol change effect. In the effect design fluctuation effect, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed in addition to the effect design. Further, the image display device 7 is capable of indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating or indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (a fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying reserved images 9A in accordance with the number of stored first special figure reservations described later and a reserved image 9B in accordance with the stored number of second special figure reservations described later. And a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a described later and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a, and the display of the reserved digestion image 9C causes the first special figure reservation or the second special figure reservation. Is digested ("digestion of special figure reservation" described later) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable role 14), which is a so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable role object 14 is configured such that two half-ring shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable auditorium 14 is normally stationary at the retreat positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advancing) to stop at the advancing position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members are united at the advanced position, the first movable auditorium 14 is formed with a ring-shaped decorative portion, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

  On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable role 15) which is a so-called gimmick is provided. The second movable role 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as “OARO” can move in the vertical direction. The second movable role 15 is normally stationary at the retreat position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (enters) downward from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stop at the advanced position ahead of the screen 7a. The second movable role 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an entrance into which game balls flow, and an exit through which game balls flow.

  The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the center opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized via the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and an image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface thereof by irradiating the LED with light from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in a plurality of types of colors, depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

  The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and has a first starting port (first starting winning port, first ball entry port, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (small jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a random number per special symbol, determining a big hit, and the like.

  The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball input port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a trigger of the lottery of the second special symbol (small jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by the electric chuck solenoid 24. The game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state (advanced state). The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state (retreat state). 2 It may be possible to enter the ball into the starting port 21.

  The first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged on the left side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3. Each is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. Passing of the game ball to the gates (the first gate 28 and the second gate 29) is a trigger of the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 usually triggers acquisition of a random number per symbol and determination of a hit.

  Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. It refers to a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by comparing with a value corresponding to “big hit” or “small hit”. The lottery results of the "big hits" and "small hits" are not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbols are fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described later. When a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbols is performed, and the lottery result of the big hit is more effectively notified to the player by the symbol matching game.

  In addition, “lottery of ordinary symbols” means that when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined by a predetermined “hit” Is determined by comparing with a value corresponding to "." Regarding the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and the ordinary symbol display unit 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol. Is performed, and when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or turned off), and the lottery result is notified to the player.

  The first special winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is disposed below the first gate 28 in the game area 3 and includes a first special winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. I have. The first special winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the reception of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33. When the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the first large winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter.

  The second special winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed below the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3 and the second special winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 is set. Have. The second special winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (a second special winning opening opening / closing member, a movable member) 37 that inhibits or permits the reception of a game ball by a shutter-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second winning port solenoid 38. When the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter.

  The second big winning device 36 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a second large winning opening sensor. 35 a, a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions through which the game balls that have passed through the second special winning opening 35 can pass inside the second special winning device 36. . The second special winning opening sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects a winning of a game ball to the second special winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39, and detects the passage of the game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V region 70, and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates clockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball by V. The first state (rotation state) of distributing to the area 39 is obtained, and the second state (stop state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing a game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, a retreat state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V region 39 is provided, and when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, an advance state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state).

  FIG. 2A shows a state when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V-opening / closing member 71 enters a state (a first state) in which a game ball is allowed to pass to the V region 39. When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then passes through the V region 39 (see FIG. 2A). A route). This route of the game ball is referred to as a “first route”. FIG. 2B shows a state where the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V-opening / closing member 71 is in a state (a second state) in which the passage of the game ball to the V region 39 is prevented. When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 to turn the non-V It passes through the area 70 (route B in FIG. 2B). This route of the game ball is referred to as a “second route”. In the gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is a trigger for executing a jackpot game (second special game) described later. In other words, the jackpot winning lottery is also performed depending on whether the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is successful or not. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol is also referred to as “one type jackpot”, and the jackpot selected by passing the game ball to the V region 39 is also referred to as “two type jackpot”.

  Returning to FIG. 1, two normal winning ports 27 are provided below the game area 3. The number of the normal winning ports 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided below the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. The details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is referred to as “left hit”. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim at passing through the second gate 29 and winning at the first starting port 20 by left-handing. On the other hand, it is configured so that the player can aim at the right gate to pass through the first gate 28 and win the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

  FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , A general-purpose-hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbols. The first special figure reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation suspensions (first special figure reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special figure display 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general symbol holding display 44 displays the number of stored operation holdings (general symbol holding) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays the special symbol (stop) to thereby perform a lottery based on a winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (a lottery per special symbol). , Jackpot small hit lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable symbol and the stopped symbol) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big winning opening 30 is formed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed (winning jackpot type). Jackpot game (the second special game) to open the game. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, an open pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol stopped and displayed (the type of the winning small hit) is displayed. A small hit game (first special game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to a result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots to be described later) is won, the left and right, such as "OOOOOOOO" (O: ON, OFF: OFF) , 5th and 6th are displayed with the big hit symbols lit. In addition, when the small hit is won (one of a plurality of types of small hits described later), the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left are turned on, such as “●●●● ○ ●●●”. Display the small hit symbol. In the case of a loss, a loss pattern in which only the rightmost LED is lit, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as the losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. In the variation display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the mode of the variable display, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball is won (entered) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random numbers such as random numbers per special symbol acquired for the winning (numeric information) ) Are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if it is a prize in the first opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85 a (FIG. 6) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize in the second starting opening 21. Are stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is four first special figure reservation storage areas 85a and second special figure reservation storage area 85b is one. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. The “extinguishment of special figure reservation” means that a special symbol per random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and a special symbol is variably displayed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of a middle game or a special game (big hit game or small hit game), it is possible to reserve the right to the big hit small lottery for the prize up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure reservation display 43b is composed of, for example, one LED. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special figure reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 by variably displaying (variable display) the normal symbols and then displaying the stopped symbols. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol that is stopped and the normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an assist for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. A game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays an ordinary symbol according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a winning, a normal winning symbol in which the first and second LEDs from the left are turned on, such as “○ ●” (○: turned on, ●: turned off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern in which only the right LED is lit, such as "●● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variation display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the mode of the variable display, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per ordinary symbol acquired for the passage is stored in the general figure holding storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a normal drawing hold. There is an upper limit to the number of general-purpose reservations that can be stored in the general-purpose reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is one. The general figure storage stored in the general figure storage area 86 is exhausted when it becomes possible to variably display ordinary symbols based on the general figure reservation. The term “extension of ordinary symbol reservation” means that a random number per ordinary symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation is determined, and variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even in the case where there is, the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose reservation display 44. The general-purpose reservation indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of general-purpose reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the main control board side. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the sub-control board side. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and a voice control board 106 ( 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control related to game profits such as a jackpot and small hit lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board for performing control relating to an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and forms a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives a signal output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first gate sensor 28a, a second gate sensor 29a, a first winning port sensor 30a, and a second starting port sensor 30a. The special winning opening sensor 35a, the V region sensor 39a, the non-V region sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chuck solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has won the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28, and detects a game ball passing through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29, and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball passing through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball passing through the non-V region 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The electric tube solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tube 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the second special winning opening 35.

  The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure reservation display 43a, a second special figure reservation display 43b, and a general figure reservation. The display of the display 44 is controlled.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a ball rental payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and a firing device 112 is connected via a firing control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out a prize ball. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental unit 130 pays out a ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending-payout apparatus 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 and pays out a ball rental. The paid-out lending balls are detected by the lending ball sensors 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information relating to ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. The firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115 when the player operates the handle 60. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with the strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  The sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls a game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 for storing a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM for executing the program stored in the sub-ROM 93. And a CPU 92. Details of data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. The ROM 103 stores, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like. ) And background image data. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the sound control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a voice, music, sound effect from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. And so on. The sound data such as the sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15, and controls these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15) via the lamp control substrate 107 based on the command received from the main control substrate 80. Lighting control). In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and determines the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15, and generates these movable auditors according to the operation pattern data. Control behavior. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable accessory based on the command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to a light emission pattern or an operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63a and the select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute a light-emitting effect via the relay substrate 108.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub-ROM 93. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol change pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. And a normal symbol hit type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, a power chute opening pattern determination table T8, and a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) has a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reserved storage area 85, and a general figure reserved storage. An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit is set in a main control main process (described later), and includes a change start command, a change stop command, an opening Command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, number of balls held command, ordinary symbol variation start command, ordinary symbol variation stop command, ordinary symbol opening command, ordinary A pattern ending command and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main processing (described later), and the big hit flag, the big hit end flag, the small hit flag, the small hit end flag, and V A flag, a time reduction flag, a V opening / closing member operation flag, and the like are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in a special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, random number groups (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first second special figure reservation. The general figure holding storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (holding information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first general figure holding. The main RAM 84 is provided with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like, in addition to the above-described areas. Have been.

  The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) includes a fluctuating effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. Is stored. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. . The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit is stored in the sub-control main processing (described later), and includes a change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , Ending command, game state designation command, V passing command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, number of reserved balls command, normal symbol variation start command, ordinary symbol variation stop command, ordinary symbol opening command, ordinary symbol ending command, etc. Is stored. The effect command setting area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set. Yes, fluctuating production start command, fluctuating production end command, opening production start command, round production start command, ending production start command, ordinary design fluctuation production start command, ordinary design fluctuation production end command, ordinary design opening production start command, ordinary design An ending production start command and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and includes a random number counter, a first special figure holding effect counter, a second special figure holding effect counter, and a general figure holding effect counter. , A first time reduction effect counter, a second time reduction effect counter, and the like. In the mode status set area 94e, a mode status (described later) indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (whether it is a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state described later) is set.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 8B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. I have. The game control microcomputer 81 includes “special random numbers per symbol”, “special random numbers per symbol”, “reach random numbers”, “variable pattern random numbers”, “random random numbers per symbol”, and “ And a “random number” at a timing described later. The “special random number per symbol” is a random number used in a lottery (small jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and has a value in a range of 0 to 65535. The “special symbol-per-type random number” is a random number used for a lottery (winning type determination) of a winning big or small winning type, and has a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect design fluctuation effect indicating the result when the jackpot / small hit determination is a loss, in a range of 0 to 127. Take the value of Reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed is the remaining one, and depends on which of the variably displayed effect symbols is stopped and displayed. Means a state in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit is won (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”). The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if swinging in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in a range from 0 to 127. The “normal random number per symbol” is a random number used in a random lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 and takes a value in a range of 0 to 255. The “ordinary symbol type random number per symbol” is a random number used in the lottery of the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery (hit type determination), and takes a value in a range of 0 to 65535. The “random number per special symbol”, “type random number per special symbol”, “reach random number”, and “variable pattern random number” are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). Is done. The random number group acquired based on the ball entering the first opening 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group acquired based on the ball entering the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “random number per ordinary symbol” and the “random number per ordinary symbol” are acquired based on passage through a gate (the first gate 28 or the second gate 29). The acquired random number value per normal symbol and the random number value per normal symbol type are stored in the general symbol holding storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the “fluctuation effect pattern random number”, the “time saving effect scenario random number”, and the “prefetch effect random number” at a timing described later. The “fluctuation effect pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation effect pattern, and takes a value in a range from 0 to 127. The “time saving effect scenario random number” is a random number used to determine a change scenario of the number of remaining time savings (remaining number of times to be displayed) displayed on the image display device 7 in the time saving state, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The "prefetch effect random number" is a random number used to determine a prefetch effect at the time of a variable effect, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “fluctuation effect pattern random number” is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “time saving effect scenario random number” is obtained based on the output of the ending command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The “prefetch effect random number” is obtained based on the output of the preliminary determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9A shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

  The special symbol hit determination table T1 indicates that the special symbol hit random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) is “big hit”, “small hit”, “losing”. Is a table that is referred to to determine which of the following conditions applies. In FIG. 9A, when the random number value per special symbol is “0 to 210” in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined to be “big hit”, and the random number value per special symbol is “ In the case of "10000 to 10500", it is determined that "small hit" is determined, and when the random number per special symbol is a numerical value other than the above from 0 to 65535, it is determined that "losing" is determined. . In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), when the random number value per special symbol is “0 to 210”, it is determined as “big hit”, and the random number value per special symbol is “10000 to 16500”. In this case, it is determined that “small hit” is determined, and when the random number value per special symbol is a numerical value other than the above from 0 to 65535, “loss” is determined.

  In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to “reach present” or “reach no”. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not the data is stored. In FIG. 9B, in the “non-time saving state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 13”, it is determined that “reach is present” and the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to 13). 127)), it is indicated that it is determined that there is no reach. Further, in the “time reduction state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and when the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”, Indicates that “reach is not performed” is determined. The contents of the "time reduction state" and the "non-time reduction state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is more difficult to reach at the time of losing in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. This is because the speed of digesting the reservation of a special figure is increased by selecting more losing without a reach having a shorter fluctuation time in the time reduction state.

  The special symbol hit type determination table T3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 2. The special symbol hit type determination table T3 indicates the “big hit type” or “big hit type” according to the special symbol hit random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine “small hit type” and “special symbol type”. In FIG. 10, when the special drawing 1 random number value is “0 to 15” in the special drawing 1 lottery in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type is “0 to 15”, the jackpot type is “15R "A", and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined as the "time saving symbol 1". When the special symbol type random number value is “16 to 63”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time savings 99 times big hit B”, and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be “hours saving symbol 2”. When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time-saving 5 times big hit A”, and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be “hour-saving symbol 3”. On the other hand, when "small hit" is selected in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the "non-work time reduction state", the small hit type is set regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is determined to be "16R normal small hit A (substantially 5R.V passing substantially impossible)" and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving small hit small symbol 1".

  When the "big hit" in the special drawing 1 lottery in the "time reduction state", if the random number value per special symbol is "0 to 63", the big hit type is determined to be "15R time reduction 99 times big hit C". , The special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be “hour reduction symbol 4”. When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R, 5 time savings, 5 big hits B”, and the special symbol 1 stopped symbol is determined to be “hours saving symbol 5”. On the other hand, when "small hit" is selected in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the "time reduction state", the small hit type is "irrespective of the special symbol hit random number value (any of 0 to 127). 16R normal small hit B (substantially 5R · V passing substantially impossible) ”is determined, and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined as“ time saving small hit symbol 2 ”.

  In FIG. 11, when the special jackpot type random number value is “0 to 63” in the special drawing 2 lottery in the “non-hour saving state” and the special symbol hit type is “0 to 63”, the jackpot type is “15R C ", and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined as the" time saving symbol 6 ". When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 95”, the big hit type is determined to be “15R time reduction 15 times big hit A”, and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be “hour reduction symbol 7”. When the special symbol type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 99 times big hit D", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "hour reduction symbol 8". On the other hand, when "small hit" is selected in the special drawing 2 lottery in the "non-time saving state", when the special symbol type random number value is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time reduction 5 times small". And the second special symbol display 41b determines that the special symbol 2 stop symbol of the special symbol 2 is "small hit symbol 1 with time reduction" on the second special symbol indicator 41b. When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 127”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 99 times small hit A (substantial 15R · V passing possible)”, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction” It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 2 ".

  If the special symbol type random number value is “0 to 79” in the special drawing 2 lottery in the “time reduction state” and the special symbol hit type is “0 to 79”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time reduction 5 times jackpot D”. , The special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be “time saving symbol 9”. When the special symbol type random number value is “80 to 95”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time reduction 15 times big hit B”, and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be “hour reduction symbol 10”. When the special symbol type random number value is “96 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time saving 99 times big hit E”, and the special symbol 2 stopped symbol is determined to be “hour saving symbol 11”. On the other hand, when "small hit" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the "time reduction state", when the random number value per type of special symbol is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R time reduction 5 times small hit". B (substantially 15 R · V passing possible) ”and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined as“ small hit symbol 3 with time reduction ”. If the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 95”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 10 times small hit (substantial 15R · V passing possible)” and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction It is determined to be "small hit symbol 4". If the special symbol type random number value is “96 to 111”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 15 times small hit (substantial 15R · V passing possible)”, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction It is determined that the small hit symbol 5 ". When the special symbol type random number value is “112 to 127”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 99 times small hit B (substantially 15R · V can pass)”, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction” It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 6 ". In addition, by referring to the special symbol hit type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol (the special symbol 1 stop symbol and the special symbol 2 stop symbol), the special game "opening" (OP) command, “round designation command”, and “ending (ED) command” can also be specified. The specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number (0 to 127). It is. In FIG. 12, for example, when the first starting port 20 is won in the non-time saving state, it is determined as “big hit” in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and when the random number of the variable pattern is “111 to 127”, the variable pattern Is determined to be “P2”. In addition, for example, in the non-working time state, the first starting port 20 is won, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines "losing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". In the case of “〜2”, it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be “P6” regardless of the variation pattern random number value (any of 0 to 127). Further, for example, when the player wins the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and determines “small hit” in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the variation pattern random number value (any one of 0 to 127) ) Indicates that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P17”. As shown in FIG. 12, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach is a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). In addition, it is determined whether there is a pseudo-ream when super-reach is performed.

  FIG. 13A shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13B shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. FIG. 13 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7. The normal symbol hit determination table T5 indicates whether the acquired random number per normal symbol (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “hit” or “loss” in the main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether it is applicable. In FIG. 13A, in both the “non-time saving state” and the “time saving state”, when the random number value per ordinary symbol is “0 to 254” in the lottery of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol), It is determined that it is determined to be "hit", and when the random number per symbol is "a numerical value (255) other than 0 to 254", it is determined to be "losing".

  The normal symbol hit type determination table T6 includes “hit type” and “hit type” according to the normal symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the “ordinary symbol type”. In FIG. 13 (B), when the random number value per symbol type is “0 to 30” when the lottery of the ordinary figure in the “non-time saving state” is won, the hit type is determined to be “long open 1”. Then, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42 is determined to be "hit symbol 1". When the random number value of the normal symbol type is “100 to 170”, the hit type is determined to be “short open 1”, and the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be “hit symbol 2”. In the case where the random number value per symbol type per normal symbol is a numerical value other than the above from 0 to 65535, it is determined that the hit type is determined to be "short open 2" and the symbol stopped at normal symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 3". Have been. On the other hand, when the winning is performed in the lottery drawing of the ordinary figure in the “time reduction state”, the hit type is determined to be “long open 2” regardless of the random number value of the type per normal symbol (any of 0 to 65535). This indicates that the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 4". By referring to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6, it is possible to specify “normal symbol stopped symbol data” (not shown) corresponding to the symbol stopped symbol.

  The ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the variation time of the general figure according to the lottery result and the hit type of the general figure. It is. In FIG. 13 (C), for example, when the lottery result of the general figure in the non-time saving state is “hit”, and when the hit type is “long open 1”, the fluctuation time of the general figure is determined to be “30 seconds”. Is shown. Also, for example, when the lottery result of the general figure in the time reduction state is “losing”, the fluctuation time of the general figure is determined to be “1 second”.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric tue opening pattern determination table T8. The electric-chu opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 in the main control main process (described later) in accordance with a general stop symbol (normal stop symbol data). Table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol 1”, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “open pattern 11”. 4 ”indicates that the release pattern is determined to be“ release pattern 14 ”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of each of the open patterns 11 to 14. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second. In the opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In the opening pattern 14, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 second, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, a maximum of two), even if the opening time remains.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. The special winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 indicates that the game control microcomputer 81 performs the first special winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 30 in the main control main processing (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the winning opening 35. In FIG. 15A, the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “13H”, “15H”, “16H”, “21H”, “22H”, “23H”, “31H”, “31H”. In the case of “32H” or “33H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be “opening pattern 21”, and the special figure stop symbol data is “14H” or “ 17H ", the open pattern is determined to be" open pattern 22 ", and when the special figure stop symbol data is" 24H "," 25H "," 34H "," 35H "," 36H ", or" 37H ". , The open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 23”. FIG. 15B shows the contents of each of the open patterns 21 to 23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 (long opening) is performed once at the 1st to 15th R times and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, the first winning opening 35 is opened once on the 1st R and the opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the opening number 2 is opened on the 2nd to 6th Rs. One opening of the first special winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed once (long opening). At the 7th to 16th rounds, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 with one opening time and an opening time of 0.1 second is performed. Open (short open). In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 second, the first big winning opening 35 is opened once at the first RR and the opening time is 1.6 seconds at the first R, and at the second to the 16th R, The opening of the first special winning opening 30 (long opening) is performed once with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. However, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is performed when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains. Will be closed.

4. Description of Jackpots and the like In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "losing" as a result of the special symbol lottery (small jackpot lottery). In the case of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", "small hit design" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "losing", "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the big hit is won, a "big hit game (second special game)" for opening the first big winning opening 30 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed (big hit type). When the small hit is won, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed (the type of the small hit). Is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V region 39 inside the second big winning opening 35 during the execution of the small winning game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the winning small winning. The “big hit game (second special game)” to be released is executed. Note that the jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot win is also referred to as a “one-type jackpot game”. The big hit game executed based on the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is also referred to as “two kinds of big hit games”. The big hit game and the small hit game are also called "special games". This special game may include a round for opening the special winning opening a plurality of times during one round.

  The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening game) for opening the first winning port 30, an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and after the last round game is completed. Ending (ED). Each round game starts by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends by the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the first special winning opening 30 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small hit game includes a small hit opening game for opening the second big winning opening 35, an opening before the small hit opening game is started (an interval before opening), and an ending (closing) after the small hit opening game is completed. After interval).

  There are several types of jackpots. Here, "15R time-saving short hits A-E", "15R time-saving short 15 times big hits A, B", and "15R time-saving short-time 5 times big hits A-D" are set as the big hit types. Each of these jackpots is a jackpot for controlling a gaming state to a “time saving state and high base state” described later, after executing a jackpot game (a type of jackpot game) for opening the first winning port 30 for 15R. . On the other hand, these hits differ in the number of time savings at which the “time saving state and high base state” after the big hit game ends. Here, the “number of time savings” is the number of times of the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol that can be executed in the “time saving state and high base state” after the big hit game, and is set in advance for each big hit type. For example, in the case of "15R time savings 99 times big hits A to E", the number of time savings is 99 times, and in the case of "15R time savings 15 times big hits A and B", the number of time savings is 15 times. The “time saving state and high base state” ends even if the number of time savings is not achieved, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

  There are multiple types of small hits. Here, as the small hit types, "16R normal small hit A, B", "16R short time 5 small hits A, B", "16R short time 10 small hits", "16R short time 15 small hits", "16R short time" 99, small hits A, B "are set. In these small hits, a small hitting game is executed first, and when a game ball passes through the V region 39 (V passing), a big hitting game (two kinds of big hitting games) is executed. Therefore, in the small hit, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1R, and the big hit game that opens the first big winning opening 30 for 15R after that, when the V passes, is executed. It corresponds to the 2nd to 16th eyes. If there is no V passing in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. Here, "16R (substantially 5R) normal small hit" is a small hit in which V passage is substantially impossible. On the other hand, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are small hits that can pass through V. . Whether or not V passing is possible during the small hitting game can be set based on the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Specifically, it is as follows.

  In each of the above-mentioned small hits, in the small hit game after the winning, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 for 1.6 seconds is performed once (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type. Specifically, “16R normal small hit” (open pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, “16R short time 5 small hits”, “16R short time 10 small hits”, and “16R short time 15 times small” The “hit” and the “small hit of 16R time reduction 99 times” (open pattern 23) have an opening time of 0.01 second. The reason why the opening time of the small hitting game is different depending on the small hitting type is that the opening timing of the second big winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening / closing member 71 which is moving by a certain operation from the start of the opening is changed. That's why. Here, when the small hitting game is started, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after the opening for 0.01 seconds. The opening pattern 22 is that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed 0.01 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is opened since the second winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small hitting game is started. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small hit", V passing during the small hit game is substantially impossible. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening and closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the small hitting game is started, and both the opening are continued for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is achieved. 2.4 seconds after the closing of the port 35, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed. Therefore, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", V passing during the small hitting game becomes possible. ing.

  "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" means that if a big hit game is executed after a small hit game, a big hit The game state after the game is controlled to a “time saving state and high base state” described later. “16R time reduction 5 times small hit”, “16R time reduction 10 times small hit”, “16R time reduction 15 times small hit”, and “16R time reduction 99 times small hit” indicate the number of times reduced in the “time reduction state and high base state” respectively. different. For example, in the case of "16R time reduction 10 times small hits", the number of times reduced is 10 times, and in the case of "16R time reduction 15 times small hits", the number of times of time reduction is 15 times. On the other hand, the “16R normal small hit” is a hit in which, when the big hit game is executed, after the big hit game, the game state is controlled to a “non-time saving state and low base state” described later. However, since the "16R normal small hit" is a small hit in which V passing is substantially impossible, the big hit game is hardly executed.

  In addition, the small hits in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state are all "16R normal small hits" in which V passing is substantially impossible. On the other hand, the distribution rate of the small hits in the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state is 50% for "5 small hits for 16R short hours", 25% for "10 small hits for 16R short hours", and "15 small hits for 16R short hours". "Is 12.5%," 16R short hit 99 times small hit "is 12.5%, and" 16R normal small hit "is not included. Since the winning probability of the jackpot does not change between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning either the “big hit” or the “small hit where the big hit game (two kinds of big hit games) is executed” is: The special figure 2 lottery in the time reduction state is higher than the special figure 1 lottery in the non-hour reduction state. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the game machine 1 hits right in the time reduction state and plays the game ball in the second startup port 21 in comparison with the state in which the game ball is left-turned in the non-time saving state and the game ball is awarded in the first starting port 20. Is set to be more advantageous for the player.

  In the gaming machine 1, there are "hit" and "losing" as a result of the normal symbol lottery (hit lottery). In the case of "hit", the "hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42. When a winning is won, a “winning game (normal game)” as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the normally displayed stopped symbol (type of winning). In this winning game (normal game), the electric chew may be opened a plurality of times during one round. The winning game (normal game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the round game is finished. . There are multiple types of hits. Here, “long open 1”, “long open 2”, “short open 1”, and “short open 2” are set as the hit types. These hits are different from each other in the fluctuation time, the opening time, the opening time, and the ending time.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute “variation time reduction control” for a special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and a normal symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 to reduce the variation time is referred to as “time reduction state”, and the state in which the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply referred to as the “non-time reduction state”. " In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) that is set such that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more frequently selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Is used to determine a fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol can be changed more than when the variable time reduction control is not executed. A short change time is easily selected as the change time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is accelerated, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot with a smooth progress of the game.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol in the time reduction state, and does not execute the control in the non-time reduction state. In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is usually shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) so that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more frequently selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Is used to determine a fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time reduction control on the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the variable of the ordinary symbol is smaller than when the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. A short change time is easily selected as the change time of the display.

  Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 13). Even in the non-time saving state, when the "Long Open 1" is won in the ordinary symbol lottery, the open pattern of the electric chew is "Open Pattern 11", which is a long open time of 5 seconds. The probability of being allocated to "open 1" is as low as 31/65536, and in most cases, the open time is 0.02 seconds even if the winner is won. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds in case of winning, so that in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state. It can be said that it is easy to become. That is, in the time-saving state, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, there are cases where these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball frequently wins the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of awarded balls to the number of launched balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not being executed is called a “low base state”. In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls on hand. It should be noted that the high base state does not have to execute all the above-described controls. That is, by executing one or more of the control of the fluctuation time for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the control of the extension of the opening time for the electric chew 22, the control of the electric chew 22 is performed more than when the control is not executed. Should be easy to open. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

  In the gaming machine 1, "15R time reduction 99 times jackpot A-E", "15R time reduction 15 times jackpot A, B", "15R time reduction 5 times jackpot A-D", "16R time reduction 99 times jackpot", "16R time reduction" The game state after the jackpot game that has been won and executed for "15 small hits for 15 times of 16R time reduction" or "10 small hits for 16R time savings" is a "time saving state and high base state". . In the “time saving state and high base state”, a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times) of a variable display (variable display) of a special symbol is executed, or a special jackpot is won. The game ends when the big hit game is executed. The gaming state after the jackpot game executed by winning the “16R normal small hit” is the “non-time saving state and low base state”. This gaming state is also referred to as a “normal gaming state”. In the case where the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal gaming state. Here, the “time reduction state and high base state” is simply referred to as “time reduction state”, and the “non-time reduction state and low base state” is simply referred to as “non-time reduction state”.

  In the high base state (reduced time), the game can be advantageously advanced when the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing. Since the electric chew 22 is more easily opened than in the low base state (non-time saving state), it is easier to win the second opening 21 than to win the first opening 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, while the game ball is passed to the first gate 28, which is usually a trigger of symbol lottery, a right-hand is made to make the second start port 21 win the game ball. As a result, a larger number of start winnings (winning to the starting opening) can be obtained than when the player hits left. Note that the gaming machine 1 performs a right-handed game even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advantageously advance the game by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. This is because the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and winning in the first starting port 20 is easier than winning in the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, a left hit is performed to pass the game ball to the first starting port 20 while passing the game ball to the second gate 29 which is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery. As a result, a larger number of start winnings can be obtained than when the player hits right. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), if the "long open 1" is won by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 is opened for 5 seconds. 2. Right-handing is performed so that a game ball can be awarded to the starting port 21. After closing the electric chew 22, the left-handed driving is performed again.

6). Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As will be described below, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the program stored in the main ROM 83, and as a result, determines whether the game is a hit / fail determination unit, a symbol control unit, a hit game execution unit, a game state control unit, or a hit type selection unit. Functions (for example, see FIGS. 22, 27 to 29, 31, and 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing a main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the setting of the main CPU 82, the reset of various flags, the status, the counter, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the various random number counter values (the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the reach random number, The fluctuation pattern random number value, the random number value per normal symbol, and the random number value per normal symbol type) are added and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the main-side timer interruption processing (step S005) can be performed. The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 msec). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 4 msec). After the main-side timer interrupt processing is completed and before the next main-side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number update process is the same as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and during the other period (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main timer interrupt processing). And both.

  After the random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the types of winning ports to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V opening / closing member control process (step S106), a V region The sensor detection processing (step S107) is sequentially executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V-region sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball count process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a pending ball number command in a command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the pending ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

  After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the command and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above-described processes. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S110). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the special figure 1 reserved ball number. The hold display 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the startup port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether a game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball has passed through one of the first gate 28 and the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)". Is determined (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol holding balls is the number of ordinary symbol holdings, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of ordinary symbol holdings. If the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (step S203), and then an ordinary symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the normal symbol per random number counter (FIG. 8: label-TRND-H) and the value of the normal symbol per type counter (FIG. 8: label-TRND-HS). ) Is acquired, and the acquired random number group is stored in the first storage area of the general-purpose reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

  In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If a game ball has not been won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball has won (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reserved balls is the number of second special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “0” (step S206: NO), after adding “1” to the special figure 2 reserved ball count (step S207), a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter per type of special symbol (FIG. 8: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter ( FIG. 8: The value of the label-TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination processing described later (the preliminary figure determination buffer). Hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). In the special figure 2 pre-judgment process, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-judgment with reference to the big hit judgment table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by a special figure 2 related random number obtaining process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not a big hit has occurred using the big hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the big hit random number value. When the result of the jackpot pre-judgment is “big hit”, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-judgment. In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by a special figure 2 related random number obtaining process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the determination values temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number obtaining process. I do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result, a jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a big hit, and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-judgment command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing.

  In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has been won at the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When a game ball has won the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S210). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of the first special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure reserved. If the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is “4” (step S211: YES), this processing is ended. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than "3" (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), and then a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (step S208), the value of the special symbol random number counter, the value of the special symbol type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are changed. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the obtained random number group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination processing. Let it. After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (step S214). The special figure 1 preliminary determination processing is similar to the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop display of the ordinary symbol is performed (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). If the normal symbol is being stopped and displayed (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the normal symbol is not being stopped and displayed (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S503). If the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. If the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S504). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S504: YES), the present process is terminated. If the number of retained balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of normally retained symbols is decremented by one (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is “0”, the ordinary symbol is temporarily set in step S203 of the start-up sensor detection processing (FIG. 18). Becomes "1", and then, in this step S505, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol immediately becomes "0". The same applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start-up opening sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, in steps S1404 and S1404 in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. In addition, the decrement of the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (digestion of regular reserved) is executed together with a clearing process for clearing the reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the regular reserved storage area 86. You.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13A) (step S506). More specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines a random number value per normal symbol as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general figure holding) of the general figure holding storage area 86. Is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning is achieved by using the random number value per normal symbol, the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state) and the normal symbol hitting determination table T5. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random number value per ordinary symbol is “0” to “254”, it is determined to be “hit”, and when the random number value per ordinary symbol is “255”, “losing” is performed. (FIG. 13A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol stopped symbol) with reference to the ordinary symbol hit type determination table T6 (FIG. 13B) (step S507). Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 has won in the hit determination in the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hitting stored in the first storage area of the ordinary figure holding storage area 86 is performed. Reads the type random value. Then, the hit type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined by using the normal symbol hit type random number value, the game state (whether or not of the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random number value per type of the ordinary symbol is “0” to “30”, the winning type is determined to be “long open 1”, and the ordinary symbol is determined to be “winning symbol 1”. . When the random number value of the normal symbol type is “100” to “170”, the hit type is determined to be “short open 1”, and the normal symbol is determined to be “hit symbol 2”. When the random number value for the normal symbol type is any other value, the hit type is determined to be “short open 2”, and the normal symbol is determined to be “hit symbol 3” (FIG. 13B). On the other hand, in the case of "losing" in the above-mentioned hit determination, "losing symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13C) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using the gaming state (whether or not a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. I do. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the hit type is “long open 1”, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “30 seconds”. Further, for example, in the time saving state, when the hit determination is “losing”, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “1 second” (FIG. 13C). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol change start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 of the change start and the change time of the normal symbol (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information on the normally stopped symbol data and information on the ordinary symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the ordinary symbols and ends the processing (step S510).

  In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13C). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the normal symbol stop symbol or the loss (A stop symbol) (step S522). Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol change stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub control board 90 of the normal symbol change stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol and ends this processing (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 second.

  In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process. That is, the normal symbol stop display is continued. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes this processing when the hit determination in the above (step S506) is “losing” (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, if the hit determination is "hit" (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 informs the sub-control board 90 of the start of the hit game (normal game) opening by opening the normal symbol opening. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric-chu opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the electric chew 22 using the type of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the ordinary symbol is “hit symbol 1”, “open pattern 11” is selected, and when the ordinary symbol is “hit symbol 4”, “open pattern 14” is selected (see FIG. 14). . After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric tuner so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this processing.

  In the above-mentioned step S501, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the winning number of the electric chew 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, two) or that the electric chew 22 is closed after the opening time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed. Either of the things that have been reached is fulfilled. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), the present process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the ending of the game (normal game), so that the normal symbol ending is performed. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Also, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this processing.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is “1” of “special operation status”. Called "2", "3", "4", "5". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a special symbol hit determination, a special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, a change stop command is output after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output at the time of a big hit or a small hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric auditors processing 1, a jackpot game (a second type special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric auditors processing 2 (small hitting game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small hit game (a first-class special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (special figure 2 reserved) is “0” (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is equal to or more than “1” (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the special symbol hit determination process (step S1402) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Execute Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digest image display area side and displayed as the reserved digest image 9C. Is done. Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 change start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 change start process, a change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the change display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". Note that the change start command (special figure 2 change start command) set in the special figure 2 change start processing includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the special design hit determination processing (step S1402) and the special design change. Information on the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) is included.

  If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “0” in step S1401 (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (reserved in special figure 1) is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1407). When the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning at the first starting port 20 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1413. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the special symbol hit determination processing (step S1408) and the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (step S1409). Execute Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 1 reserved ball count is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the first special drawing reservation is digested in the order of reservation. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the reserved digestion image display area side and displayed as the reserved digestion image 9C. If the second to fourth storage areas in the first special figure storage area 85a have the hold information, the hold image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (the right image among the four hold images 9A) , The second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A) are shifted right by one. Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 change start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 change start process, the change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the change display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1406). Note that the change start command (special figure 1 change start command) set in the special figure 1 change start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination processing (step S1408) and the special design change. Information about the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection processing (step S1409) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON / OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this processing ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol change display based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is “0”. In other words, the second special figure reservation is consumed prior to the first special figure reservation.

[Special symbol hit determination process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). The hit determination process of Toku-zu 2 (step S1402) and the hit determination process of Toku-zu 1 (step S1408) have the same processing flow, and will be described together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for the special figure 2, the random number value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the second special figure holding storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 hit determination processing, a special symbol random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the first special figure holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the special symbol hit determination table T1 to be referred to, and the read special symbol hit random value to determine whether or not a big hit and a small hit. In this manner, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as “winning / failing determining means”.

  When the result of the special symbol hit determination is “big hit” (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for the special figure 2, the special symbol type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b is read. In the hit determination process of special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the big hit type based on the read special symbol type random number and the special symbol type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as “hit type selection means”. After the determination of the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (the jackpot symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is not “big hit” (step S1503: NO), but is “small hit” (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol hit type random number value as a judgment value, similarly to the jackpot type judgment. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol type random number and the special symbol type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After the determination of the small hit type, the special figure stop symbol data (small hit symbol) corresponding to the specified small hit type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and the process is terminated.

  If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit" but "losing" (steps S1503 and S1510: NO), special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the missing symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. This is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1518), and this process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
FIGS. 23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a time saving state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not it is in the time saving state is made based on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602).

  If the big hit flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state big hit table in the special symbol change pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) to select a change pattern. This is performed (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection processing of Toku-zu, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu reservation of first Toku-zu) is stored in the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time saving state big hit, a portion corresponding to the non-time saving state big hit in the special symbol change pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the change pattern is "P1", "P2" (In FIG. 2, the variation pattern is “P14”) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, either “P1” or “P2” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu, and “P14” is selected in Toku-zu 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table in the special symbol change pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). A selection is made (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value in the same manner as in step S1603. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the portion where the variation pattern is “P3” in Toku-zu 1 and the portion where the variation pattern is “P15” in Toku-zu 2. Therefore, these are selected irrespective of the random value of the fluctuation pattern.

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S1604 (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach-achieved random number (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of Toku-zu, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu of special toku-zu) is stored in the first toku-zu pending storage area 85a. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9B) and the reach random number. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”). Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number is a reach-achieved random number (step S1606: YES), that is, if a reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reach in the non-time-saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The change pattern is selected with reference to the table for the loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for the reach loss in the non-time saving state, a portion corresponding to the reach loss in the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is “P4 , "P5", and in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P14". In the special figure 1, one of “P4” and “P5” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value. In the special figure 2, “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random number.

  If the reach random number is not a reach-achieved random number (step S1606: NO), that is, if there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reach in the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-loss (step S1608). Here, as the table for the non-reduction time non-reachable loss, the portion corresponding to the non-reduction time non-reachable loss in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (the fluctuation pattern is “P6 And "P7", and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern is "P15". In the special figure 1, either “P6” or “P7” is selected as a fluctuation pattern from the read random number value of the fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved special figure 1 balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, “P15” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random number. In the special figure 1, since the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls changes, the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in the special map 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more variation patterns having a shorter variation time are selected as compared to when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big hit flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, and a description thereof will not be repeated. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 is that the part of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618 is described in steps S1603, S1605, and S1607. , S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the non-working time state table of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, The table for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state (the portion whose variation pattern is "P9" in Tokujin Figure 1, and the variation pattern is "P17" in Tokujin Figure 2) Part) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1617, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a portion corresponding to a loss with reach in the time saving state (the portion where the variation pattern is “P10” in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P18") is referred to.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the process. The information of the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: step S109). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 20: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol change time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-described special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). . Further, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol). Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as "symbol control means". The special symbol stop display time can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state in accordance with the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the time saving state, and the content will be described later. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (step S1802).

  If the big hit flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a winning pattern opening pattern according to the type of the big hit that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the determined opening pattern. set. Here, regardless of which jackpot type (regardless of the special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, or 31H to 33H), "open pattern 21" Is set. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the setting of the opening pattern of the special winning opening. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "15" is set in the round counter for any of the jackpot types (FIG. 15B).

  After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804). If the time saving flag is ON (step S1804: YES), it is turned OFF (step S1805). As a result, during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game, the non-time saving state is set. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, an opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this processing ends. When the special operation status is set to "4", the processing shifts to special electric auditors processing 1 (big hit game).

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S1802 (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). If the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a winning pattern opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the special winning opening pattern determination table T9, similarly to step S1803 described above. Set the release pattern that was set. Here, for example, when the small hit type is “16R normal small hit A” (the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”), “open pattern 22” is set as the open pattern of the winning opening. Further, for example, when the small hit type is “16R, 5 small hits for 5 times, small hit A” (the special figure stop symbol data is “24H”), “open pattern 23” is set as the open pattern of the winning opening. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning small win along with the setting of the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Here, “16” is set in the round counter for any of the small hit types (FIG. 15B).

  After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening / closing member operation flag is a flag indicating a period during which the V opening / closing member 71 is operated. In the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening / closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any small hitting game, the V opening / closing member 71 operates so as to be closed as an opening for 0.01 second after the small hitting game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. When the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, even if the time saving flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF. After that, in order to start the small hitting game, a small hit opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small hitting game is started (step S1814). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and the process ends. When the special operation status is set to “5”, the processing shifts to special electric auditors processing 2 (small hitting game).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S1810 (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1820), and ends the process. As a result, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) to execute the special symbol hit determination for the next hold.

[Gaming state management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, if the time saving flag is in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, when the time reduction state is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements each value of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 by 1 (step S2010). S2015). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of times the second special symbol has been changed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the time saving state (total of the number of times the first special symbol has changed and the number of times the second special symbol has changed). The initial value set in each of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is determined based on the setting table of FIG. 30 in a later-described game state setting process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the change is the change of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 by 1 (step S2020).

  The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the respective values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 has become “0” as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step S2015). S2030). If the values of both the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 are not “0” (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. When the value of at least one of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is “0” (step S2030: YES), the time-saving flag is turned off (step S2035). Thereby, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. That is, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed in the time saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

  In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the current game state that has just been set (whether or not the state is the time reduction state, the respective values of the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction counter, etc.).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The “big hit end flag” is a flag indicating that the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the currently running big hit game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first big winning opening 30 is open (step S2202). If it is being opened (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  If the first special winning opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203). . The time (timing) for opening the first special winning opening 30 is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed and the time of opening start in the first round game has been reached, or the first big winning opening 30 has been temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first special winning opening 30 is reopened elapses and the time of starting the opening again is reached. If it is not the time (timing) for opening the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is the time (timing) for opening the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first special winning opening 30 in accordance with an opening pattern (FIG. 15B) corresponding to the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). When the one-type jackpot game is being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 for any jackpot type. When the two kinds of big hit games are being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the small hit type. After the winning opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game being executed (small jackpot game and big jackpot game), and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. I do. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. In the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first large winning opening 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening of the first large winning opening 30 to one. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is the first release during one round, and to set the round designation command only for the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2202, when the first special winning opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is satisfied. (Step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the first large winning opening 30 in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the first large winning opening 30 is Either one of the times that the closing time has come (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the first special winning opening 30) is satisfied. Then, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first special winning opening 30 (step S2211). Finish the process.

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the first big winning opening 30 was closed. As described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first special winning opening 30 during the round game is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the first special winning opening 30. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

  If the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter has become “0”. Is determined (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, the process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), the jackpot game ending command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a jackpot termination process for terminating the jackpot game (step S2227). , Start the jackpot ending (step S2228). The ending command includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

  If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2200 described above (step S2200: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed since the last round has ended. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231), turns off the big hit flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thereby, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state setting process (step S2234) described later, and ends the process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets a game state (hour reduction state or non-hour reduction state) after the jackpot game, and in the case of the time reduction state, the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction according to the hit type. This is a process of setting an initial value (the number of time savings) to the counter C2.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as “game state control means” by executing the above-described game state management processing (FIG. 27) and the game state setting processing. First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the jackpot game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, "15R time saving 5 times big hit", "15R time saving 15 times big hit", "15R time saving 99 times big hit", "16R time shortening 5 times small hit". It is determined whether or not the game is a jackpot game that has been executed upon the occasion of “winning”, “10 hits of 16R time reductions, 10 hits of 16R time reductions”, and “99 hits of 16R time reductions” (step S2301). . If the time saving hit is not an opportunity (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current big hit game is being executed with a normal hit (ie, “16R normal small hit”), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, if the current big hit game is being executed with a time saving hit (step S2301: YES), the time saving flag is turned on (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving The setting values shown in the setting table (FIG. 30) described later are set in the counter C2 (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the current big hit game is set to the “time saving state and high base state”. This “time saving state and high base state” is a condition that either the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, or that the next big hit (one kind big hit or two kinds big hit) is won. The process ends when the condition is satisfied. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the game state that has just been set (whether or not the state is the time reduction state, the respective values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2, etc.).

  FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the above-mentioned game state setting process (FIG. 29). In FIG. 30, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with the trigger “15R time short 99 times big hit” or “16R time short 99 times small hit” (the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H” , “15H”, “25H”, or “37H”), “99” is set in each of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. Also, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with “16R time reduction 10 times small hit” as an opportunity (when the special figure stop symbol data is “35H”), “10” is displayed in the first time reduction counter C1. Is set, and “15” is set in the second time reduction counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
FIGS. 31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory processing 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The microcomputer 81 for game control functions as a "winning game execution means" by executing the above-described special electric auditors processing 1 (big hit game: FIG. 28) and the special electric auditors processing 2 (small hitting game). I do. First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The “small hit end flag” is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small hit game being executed. If the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. When the small hit end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second special winning opening 35 is being opened (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

  If the second special winning opening 35 is not being opened (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404). . The time (timing) for opening the second special winning opening 35 is the time when the opening time of the small hit has elapsed and the opening start time has come. The opening time per small hit is 4 seconds for the open pattern 22 and 0.01 second for the open pattern 23. If it is not time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: NO), the present process is ended. If it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second big winning opening 35 according to an opening pattern (FIG. 15B) corresponding to the small hit type. After the winning opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2402, if the second special winning opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied. This is performed (step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the second special winning opening 35 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 10) or that the time for closing the second special winning opening 35 has been reached. (I.e., a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second special winning opening 35). When the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening closing process to close (close) the second special winning opening 35. This is performed (step S2412). Here, at the same time, the ending command of the small hit game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small hit end game for ending the small hit game. After the winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by one (step S2414). This is because the small hit game corresponds to the 1R. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends the process.

  If the small hit end flag is ON in step S2400 (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not an interval time (ending time) after closing has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2430). The “V flag” is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed to the V region 39 during execution of the small hit game, and is a flag that is turned on in a V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later. . When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter to “0” (step S3432) and does not set the special operation status to “1” because the two-type jackpot game is not executed. (Step S2434), and the process ends. Thereby, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again.

  If the V flag is ON in the above step S2430 (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag OFF (step S2436), and executes the big hit game in order to execute the two kinds of big hit games. Is turned on (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to “4” (step S2438). When the special operation status is set to “4”, the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game) in the next special operation processing (FIG. 20). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it off (step S2442). As a result, during the execution of the two kinds of jackpot games, the non-time saving state is set. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command for the two types of jackpot games (step S2444) and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). Thereby, it shifts from the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short time to the two kinds of big hit game.

[V opening / closing member control processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). If the V opening / closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this processing ends. When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), the “V opening / closing member operation process” for operating the V opening / closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and the V opening / closing member operation is performed in a predetermined period (timing). A “V valid period setting process” is performed in which the V passing of the game ball is regarded as valid (step S2504). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hitting game is started (FIG. 26: steps S1812 and S1814), so that the V opening / closing member operation process and the V valid period setting process are performed in accordance with the small hitting game. Will be done.

  In the V opening / closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operation time of the V opening / closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned ON when the opening timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes. When the closing timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned off. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 moves by a constant operation from the start of the small hit game opening. Specifically, the V opening / closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 second from the start of the small hit game opening, and then controlled to a passage permitted state (open state) for 4 seconds. Thereafter, the state is controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

  In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period is set for the above-described constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71. The “V valid period” is a period in which, when a game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a, the detection is regarded as valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V validity period is from when the opening of the V region 39 is started (when the V opening / closing member 71 is controlled to be in the passage permitting state) until a predetermined time elapses. The predetermined time is set to a longer time (here, the opening time of the V region 39 + 1 second) than the opening time of the V region 39 (the time during which the V opening / closing member 71 is controlled to allow passage). This is because a time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 reaches the V region 39 is considered. In the V validity period setting process, a timer for measuring the V validity period is set, and based on the timer, the V validity flag is turned ON when the V region 39 becomes valid, and the V region 39 is set to ON. The V-valid flag is turned off when it is time to invalidate it. In a V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the V valid period based on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

  After the V opening / closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening / closing member operation process (step S2502), the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start of the V opening / closing member 71 to the end of the constant operation to the end thereof. ) Is determined. If the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has not been completed (step S2506: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this processing.

  Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 32) in the small hit game will be described. As described above, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 second from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the “16R normal small hit” (opening pattern 22), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small hit game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4.41. Closed for seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of “16R normal small hit”, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed 0.01 second after the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the V passing of the game ball during the small hitting game is performed. Has become virtually impossible. On the other hand, in the case of “16R time reduction 5 times small hit”, “16R time reduction 10 times small hit”, “16R time reduction 15 times small hit” (“16R time reduction 99 times small hit”) (opening pattern 23), the second big winning opening 35 Is closed for 0.01 second from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the small hitting game is started, and both the opening are continued for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is achieved. 2.4 seconds after the closing of the port 35, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed. Therefore, no matter what winning timing the gaming ball wins in the second big winning opening 35, the gaming ball can pass through the V region 39. In this case, if the game ball is continuously shot with the right-handed hit, the second large winning opening 35 is ensured so that the game ball always wins during the opening period of the second large winning opening 35. Each device such as the special winning device 36 is arranged. The time required for the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 35 to reach the position where the V opening / closing member 71 is disposed is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "16R short time 5 small hits", "16R short time 10 small hits", "16R short time 15 small hits", and "16R short time 99 small hits" If the game ball is continuously fired, the game ball always passes through V.

[V region sensor detection processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of a game ball by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V validity period is set to several seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed (ball brush period). Here, one second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not during the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V passage command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2603). Step S2604), this process ends. The “V passing command” is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of V passing.

7). Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94. As will be described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an effect executing means by reading out a program stored in the sub-ROM 93.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the power of gaming machine 1 is turned on, effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from sub-ROM 93. In the sub control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, status, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interruption processing (step S4015), and performs the random number update processing (step S4020). In the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds and updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8B by one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, two or more random numbers may be added in addition to one by one. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the sub-side timer interruption processing (step S4035) becomes possible. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed after the sub-side timer interrupt process is completed and before the next sub-side timer interrupt process is started.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs setting of display contents of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, This is transmitted to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received the various commands executes a voice effect of outputting voice from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 receiving the various commands executes a lamp effect for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission processing, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320), and ends this processing. In other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 36: step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a prefetch effect determination process is performed (step S4420). "Pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and determining a pre-reading effect pattern to be executed. In the look-ahead effect determination process, a look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether to execute a look-ahead effect, and a look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub-ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and a pre-reading effect pattern for performing a pre-reading effect are determined. When it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

  On the other hand, when the pre-determination command has not been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination processing is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect indicating that it is highly likely that the jackpot is included in the suspension information newly stored in the special figure suspension storage area 85, and is executed during the fluctuation effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the suspension display processing, the information is provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 on the basis of information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the ordinary symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command. The updated values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. Thereby, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to display the hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter. 9B is updated. On the other hand, if the pending ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). The “variable effect start process” is a process of selecting a variable effect pattern (contents) to be executed during a special symbol change. Details of the variable effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), the variable effect ending process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The “variable effect ending process” is a process for stopping the variable effect, and will be described later in detail. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described variable effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and substitutes the information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command set at the time of winning determination for the big hit or the small hit. Set in the RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is stored in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. And display it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during opening of a special winning opening or during an interval between opening in a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the round effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. I do. Then, an effect pattern of a round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is directed to the effect of the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. The details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small hit game from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process different from the above ending effect pattern determination process. If the ending command of the jackpot game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), normal symbol fluctuation effect start processing is performed (step S4510). The “normal symbol fluctuation effect start process” is a process of selecting a normal symbol fluctuation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the normal symbol fluctuation. In the ordinary symbol variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets information on the ordinary symbol stop symbol data included in the ordinary symbol variation start command and information on the ordinary symbol variation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub RAM 94. I do. The set information includes game state information indicating a current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of a hit determination process of a general symbol, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects a normal symbol variation effect pattern set in advance corresponding to the ordinary symbol variation pattern, and sends a normal symbol variation effect start command for starting the selected ordinary symbol variation effect to the sub-RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the normal symbol fluctuation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, if the winning type is “long open 1” or “short open 1” in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the “expected effect of V” (FIG. 44) described later. . If the normal symbol variation start command has not been received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol variation effect start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), normal symbol fluctuation effect ending processing is performed (step S4520). The “normal symbol variation effect ending process” is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol fluctuation effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol fluctuation stop command and sets a normal symbol fluctuation effect end command for ending the normal symbol fluctuation effect in the effect command set area 94b. . In addition, in step S4515, when the normal symbol variation stop command has not been received (step S4515: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol variation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it has been received (step S4525: YES), a normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The “normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the time of a hit game (normal game) accompanying a normal symbol win. The normal game effect selected here includes an opening effect performed during the opening and an open game effect performed during the opening of the electric chew 22. In the ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ordinary symbol opening command and relates to the ordinary symbol stop symbol data included in the ordinary symbol opening command and set at the time of determining the winning of the ordinary symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and a normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command of the sub RAM 94. It is set in the set area 94b. When the ordinary symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sets a predetermined opening effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the ordinary symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (step S4525: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ordinary symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it has been received (step S4535: YES), a normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The “normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the hit game (normal game) accompanying the normal symbol winning. In the ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ordinary symbol ending command, and sets information on the ordinary symbol stop symbol data included in the ordinary symbol ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an ending effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and a normal symbol ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is sent to the effect command of the sub RAM 94. It is set in the set area 94b. When the ordinary symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sets a predetermined ending effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the ordinary symbol ending command has not been received in step S4535 (step S4535: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is the time reduction state, the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction). The respective values of the counters are stored in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V passage command, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the RAM 94 to hold the information that has passed the V passage. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (such as a customer waiting standby command, a preliminary determination command, a RAM clear notification command, and the like), and ends the process. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as “effect effecting means” by executing the variable effect ending process (step S4470) and the opening effect pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variation effect start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information on the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a result of the hit determination process for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). “Mode status M” indicates the effect mode to be executed. The effect mode here is a mode of the effect on the image display device 7, and when the effect mode is different, the image (characters, items, background images, etc. appearing) displayed on the image display device 7 is different, and the effect is fluctuating. Is also executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Here, “1” and “2” are set as the mode status M, “1” corresponds to the non-time saving state, and “2” corresponds to the time saving state. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is “1” or “2”.

  When the mode status M is “2” (step S5010: YES), that is, when the time reduction state is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the time reduction effect scenario (step S5025). The “time saving effect scenario” is a remaining time saving number displayed on the image display device 7 (hereinafter “display time saving remaining number”) in a “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) described later, which is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. FIG. The time reduction effect scenario is determined in an ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. Here, the "number of remaining time savings" is the remaining number of times of the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the number of times of the variation display of the second special symbol already executed in the time saving state is This is the remaining number of times until the number of time savings set according to the hit type is reached. The number of remaining time savings corresponds to the value of the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the number of remaining time savings becomes “0”, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (FIG. 27: steps S2030 and S2035). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs an effect of making the number of remaining display time savings displayed on the image display device 7 different from or matching the actual number of remaining time savings based on the time saving effect scenario. Specific modes will be described later. Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed this time from the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 described later and the time reduction effect scenario. When the mode status M is “1” (step S5010: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the reference to the time saving effect scenario.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first obtains a random value of the variable effect pattern for effect determination. Then, from the fluctuation effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation effect pattern random number value, the number of remaining display time reductions specified during the time reduction, the special effect flag Is set as a variation effect pattern corresponding to ON / OFF of the. The “special effect flag” is a flag indicating whether or not to execute a “one time effect of crying” (FIG. 48) described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub RAM 94. When the special effect flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 switches the special effect flag to OFF and executes “one time crying effect” as a variable effect. On the other hand, when the special effect flag is OFF and the change pattern indicated by the change start command is “P12” to “P15”, that is, when the change is the change of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state, the “V card Shuffle production "(FIG. 44 (G)). When the mode status M is “2”, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) described later. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as a “number-of-times display effect execution means” because it performs this countdown effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the contents of the notice effect such as a so-called step-up notice effect or a chance-up notice effect based on the random value of the fluctuation effect pattern, and further refers to the stop symbol pattern determination table T52 to stop. The combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. By these, what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect is determined.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), End this processing. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: Step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sets a predetermined variable effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Variation effect end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variable effect ending process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). If the mode status M is “1” (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is “2” (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S5115). The effect control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the variation is a variation of the first special symbol or a variation of the second special symbol from the information on the variation pattern set in the sub RAM 94. When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements each value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 by one. (Step S5120). The “first time reduction effect counter JC1” is for counting the number of times of the change of the second special symbol executed during the time reduction state on the sub control unit side, and the “first time reduction counter C1” on the main control unit side. Yes, it is. The “second time reduction effect counter JC2” is the number of times of the change of the special symbol (the total number of times of the change of the first special symbol and the number of times of the change of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state on the sub control unit side. It counts and corresponds to the "second time reduction counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 are determined in an ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, when the change is the change of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time-saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

  The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether at least one of the respective values of the first and second time reduction effect counters JC1 and JC2 has become “0” as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If the values of both the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 are not “0” (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When the value of at least one of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 is “0” (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to “1” (step S5135). When the mode status M is switched to “1”, the effect control microcomputer 91 also determines whether or not the special figure 2 is reserved. If the special figure 2 is reserved, the special effect flag is set. Switch to ON. Thereby, when the special figure 2 is held when the time saving state is shifted to the non-time saving state, the "one-time crying effect" (FIG. 48) described later is executed as the first variable effect in the non-time saving state. . In step S5130, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the game is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state based on the information on the game state held in the sub RAM 94. 1 ". The information on the game state held in the sub RAM 94 is updated when a game state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command for terminating the variable effect. As a result, the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The effect control microcomputer 91 sets information about the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a mode status setting process (step S5505). The “mode status setting process” is a process for determining an effect mode after the jackpot game. In the mode status setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using a mode status M setting table described below.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table referred to in order to determine the mode status M according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the two types of big hit game after winning the “16R normal small hit A”, the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is “1”. Is selected. In addition, for example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the one-type jackpot game after winning the “15R time-saving 99 times jackpot E”, the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 33H. “2” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 40, when the mode status M set in step S5505 is “1” (step S5510: NO), the processing of the effect control microcomputer 91 skips to step S5525. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S5510: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 hits the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2, and types (special figure stop symbol data). Are set (step S5515). The set value set in the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set in the first time-saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. The set value set in the second time-saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set in the second time-saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub-ROM 93. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table, thereby making the first time saving. The set value to be set in the effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 can be specified. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “99” is set in each of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “35H”, “10” is set to the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and “15” is set to the second time reduction effect counter JC2. After setting the set values in the time reduction effect counters JC1 and JC2, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a time reduction effect scenario determination process (step S5520). The “time-saving effect scenario determination process” is performed in a time-counting effect (FIG. 47), which will be described later in the time-saving state after the jackpot game, in the number of remaining time-saving times displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (the number of remaining display time-saving times). ) Is a process for determining a change scenario. In the time-saving effect scenario determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a time-saving effect scenario using a time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 described below.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 is a table that is referred to in order to determine a time-saving effect scenario according to a hit type (special figure stop symbol data) and a random number of the time-saving effect scenario. The effect control microcomputer 91 first obtains the random number value of the time-saving effect scenario. Then, a time reduction effect scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the obtained random number value, and the time reduction effect scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of a two-type jackpot game after winning the “16R time reduction 99 times small hit A” (special figure stop symbol data 25H), if the obtained random number value of the time saving effect scenario is “0 to 63” If "scenario B" is selected as the time-saving effect scenario, and if the random value of the time-saving effect scenario is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as the time-saving effect scenario, and the random number value of the time-saving effect scenario is "96 to 127". If so, “scenario D” is selected as the time reduction effect scenario. In addition, for example, in the case of the ending of one type of jackpot game after winning the “15R five-time jackpot D” (special figure stop symbol data 31H), regardless of the obtained random number value of the time-saving effect scenario, the time-saving effect scenario is used. “Scenario H” is selected.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time reduction effect scenario. In FIG. 43, in each of the time reduction effect scenarios (scenarios A to H), the time reduction displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) executed in the time reduction state after the jackpot game. The correspondence between the remaining number of times (remaining number of display time reductions) and the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in “Scenario A”, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the display screen 7a to display the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "scenario B", when the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time reductions, and thereafter, the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "96". , The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced along with the decrease in the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from “99” to “96”, the number of remaining display time reductions changes from “5” to “2”. When the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "95", the display time reduction number is set to "1", and a display indicating that the display time reduction number increases by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the first time-saving effect counter JC1 changes from “94” to “1”, the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining number of times to be displayed. In “Scenario E”, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is “15”, “5” is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time reductions, and thereafter, the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is “12”. , The number of remaining display time reductions is reduced along with the decrease in the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from “15” to “12”, the number of remaining display time reductions changes from “5” to “2”. Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "11", the display time remaining number is set to "1", and a display indicating that the display time reduction number increases by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, until the first time-saving effect counter JC1 changes from “10” to “1”, the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining number of times to be displayed. In this way, by making the display time reduction remaining number different from the actual time reduction remaining number, that is, the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1, the player is expected that the display time reduction remaining number may increase in the middle. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the ending effect pattern with reference to the mode status M (step S5530). A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94 so that an ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this processing.

8). Example effect of this embodiment [Expectation effect of V (at the time of normal symbol winning in non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected effect of V. The expected production of V is a non-time saving state, when the special figure 1 is fluctuating or stopped, a normal symbol is won, and the hit type is “long open 1” or “short open 1” (see FIG. 13). Is executed. The expected effect of V is an effect that indicates whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened long, and further, when a game ball enters the electric chew 22, an effect that indicates the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 2. is there.

  The expected production of V is performed during the fluctuating production of the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 44A by using the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when the non-time-saving state is left-handed. The game is executed when the game ball is passed to the second gate 29 during the reach state and a normal symbol is won and the hit type is “long open 1” or “short open 1”. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4505: YES), and includes this command in the ordinary symbol variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4510). It is determined that the hit type is “long open 1” or “short open 1” from the information on the normally stopped symbol data, and the change pattern corresponding to the expected effect of V is selected. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of the special figure 1 is not changed until then. The expected cut-in effect of V that displays the image GA1 indicating that the expected effect of V is started is executed using the region that has been performed. The display area HR1 is provided at one corner of the display screen 7a. In the effect of the display area HR1, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the change start process (FIG. 37: step S4460), the change effect start command. This is executed by setting (FIG. 38: Step S5020).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a V-level challenge effect is displayed in which an image GA2 for urging the player to press the effect button 63 and an image GA3 indicating an indicator capable of expressing an increase in points are displayed. . In the V-level challenge effect, the player can raise the point of the indicator of the image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63 to increase the V level. In the V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown after the display region HR1.

  In the case where the hit type of the ordinary symbol is “short opening 1”, the short-time opening of the electric chew 22 for 0.02 seconds (FIG. 14), and then the indicator of the indicator as shown in FIG. By lowering the point, the image GA4 indicating that the V level has decreased and the V level could not reach a certain level or more, and the image GA5 indicating that the V level has decreased and indicating that a big hit cannot be expected this time, are displayed. Perform a level-down production. In the V level down effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display region HR1.

  On the other hand, when the hit type of the ordinary symbol is “Long opening 1”, then, as shown in FIG. Point GA is raised to indicate that the V level has risen and the V level has reached a certain level or more, and that the V level has risen and the next stage has proceeded to suggest that the jackpot can be expected. A V level up effect for displaying the image GA7 is executed. In this V-level up effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display region HR1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), in order to shift to the next stage, an image GA8 for urging the player to make a right strike to enter the electric ball into the electric chew 22 is displayed on the right. Performs a suggestion effect. Note that, in the right-handed suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the variable effect of the special figure 1 is shown following the display region HR1. This right-stroke suggestion effect is executed until the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 displayed in the display area HR1 ends. The right pointing suggestion effect is executed based on the ordinary symbol opening command (FIG. 37: step S4525) received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80.

  If no ball has entered the electric chute 22, the above-described right-turning suggestion effect is performed, and then the above-described V level down effect shown in FIG. 44 (D) is executed. This V level down effect is executed based on the ordinary symbol ending command (FIG. 37: step S4535) received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80. On the other hand, when one or more balls are thrown into the electric chute 22, after the above-described right-struck suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. A V-card shuffle effect for displaying an image GA9 for shuffling the oriented card is executed. In this case, in the display area HR2 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, the variation state of the decorative symbol is shown. The V-card shuffle effect and the effect of the display area HR2 are executed based on the change start command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 triggered by the winning in the second starting port 21.

  In the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment in Toku-zu 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V-card shuffle effect, as shown in FIG. One of the cards is selected and turned over, and a V card selection effect of displaying an image GA10 indicating that the turned up card is a V card is executed. In the display area HR2, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the symbol arrangement indicating the small hit or one type of big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (I), an expected success effect of V displaying an image GA11 suggesting that a big hit game is executed and a right strike suggestion image GA12 prompting right strike is executed. The expected success production of V indicates that the expected production of V is successful and that the degree of expectation of the jackpot (one or two kinds of jackpots) is high. In other words, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests that. The expected success effect of V is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed after the symbol arrangement of the zigzag pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is definitely displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the expected success effect of V is started, and when the big hit symbol is finally displayed, the expected success effect of V is started. The timing (time) until the time is equal. Here, “equal” does not mean that they completely match, and there may be an error in timing as long as the range is felt by the player to be equal. The error may be, for example, about ± 2 seconds. In the case of a small hit, a small hit game is executed after the expected success performance of V, and when the player passes through V by right-handing, two kinds of big hits are made, and the game shifts to a big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect indicating that a big hit (two types of big hits) game is executed even though the vehicle does not pass through V (FIG. 44). (I)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hitting game, the effect indicating the small hitting game or the effect indicating the V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game, and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. In this embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 44 (I)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the type 1 jackpot and the type 2 jackpot. It should be noted that even if the numbers of the zigzag lines stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is definitely displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination in Toku-zu 2 is a loss, after the V-card shuffle effect, one of the three cards shuffled in the V-card shuffle effect as shown in FIG. A card is selected and turned over, and a lost card selection effect of displaying an image GA13 indicating that the flipped card is a lost card is executed. In the display area HR2, a reach state using a decorative symbol is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (K), the expected production of V is an unsuccessful production of V which displays an image GA14 indicating that the expected production of V is unsuccessful and loses without being a big hit or a small hit and the big hit game is not executed. Execute In this case, in the display area HR2, a symbol array indicating a loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If the special figure 2 is suspended, the process shifts to the V card shuffle effect (see FIG. 44 (G)) again after the expected failure effect of V. When there is no suspension of the special figure 2, the process shifts to the effect corresponding to the normal special figure 1.

  Note that the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (H), and (I) is an example of the effect performed when the fluctuation pattern “P13” (FIG. 12) is selected. The fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (J) and (K) is an example of the effect executed when the fluctuation pattern “P14” (FIG. 12) is selected.

  Also, a V-level challenge effect (FIG. 44 (C)), a V-level down effect (FIG. 44 (D)), a V-level increase effect (FIG. 44 (E)), and a right-handed suggestion effect (FIG. 44 (F)) In ()), the variable effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44A is shown in the display area HR1, but the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 is suspended. In this case, the variable effect corresponding to the next special figure 1 is continuously displayed.

  Further, in the expected effect of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is omitted. In addition, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and FIG. 50 described later, similarly, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digestion image 9C is omitted.

[Win Game Direction]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory view exemplifying a winning game effect when the special figure 2 lottery is won. This winning game effect is executed when a big hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot game or the small hit game opening command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4480). When it is determined from the information on the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, the corresponding opening effect start command is set and executed. This winning game effect: FIG. 45 (A) is, for example, an effect (expected successful effect of V: FIG. 44 (I), V roulette successful effect: FIG. 46 (C), Successful application: executed after FIG. 48 (C)).

  First, at the start of the big hit game with one type of big hit or at the start of the small hit game with a small hit, as shown in FIG. A suggestion image GB1 and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), an image GB3 indicating that a big hit game is to be executed using a predetermined character or the like and a right strike suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

  The effects of FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are continued in a single-type jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as “first game period”) elapses from the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the small hit game, the game is continued from the start of the small hit game until the first game period elapses. That is, in both the large hit game and the small hit game, an effect of the same content (similarly) is performed during the first game period. In the first game period, at least the opening time (here, 0.01 seconds) of the small hit game (opening pattern 23) and the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (here, 1.6). Second) and the total time (1.61 second) or more. Here, the first game period is a period from the start of the small hitting game to the end of the small hitting game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big winning port 35 (1.6 seconds)) 4.61 seconds of (+ ending time (3 seconds)) is set. When the first game period elapses from the start of the jackpot game associated with one type of jackpot, or when the first game period elapses from the start of the small hit game and two types of jackpots due to V passing are determined, As shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image GB4 that clearly suggests that a big hit game is being played and a right strike suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when two kinds of big hits are made after the small hit game, the effects of FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C) are executed as in the case of one kind of big hit.

  On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game due to the small hit and the non-execution of the big hit game is determined by the V non-passage, instead of the image GB4, FIG. As shown, an image GB5 indicating that the jackpot game is not executed is displayed.

  In the hit game effects in the present embodiment, the effects during the one-type jackpot game and the effects during the small-hit game and the two-type jackpot game with the small hit are the same (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (B)). C)). In other words, the effect from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game and the effect from the start of the small hit game to the end of the two big hit games are configured to be the same effect. Even if the two kinds of big hits are not executed after the small hitting game accompanying the small hitting, at least during the small hitting game, the same effect as in the case of the one kind big hitting (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) ) Is performed, and after the lapse of the first game period, an effect (FIG. 45D) different from the case of the one-type jackpot is performed. The “similar (same) effect” here means that the content should be close enough to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between jackpot and small hit effects, and the effects need not be completely the same. . For example, when some characters are different, when some aspects of the predetermined character (for example, clothes, clothes color, equipment) are different, or when the appearance timing of the predetermined character is slightly different, etc. Naturally, it is included in similar productions. In the hit game effect according to the present embodiment, when two kinds of big hits occur after the small hit game, the big hit game effects (FIGS. 45A and 45B) are started based on the fact that the small hit game has passed V. Instead, the big hit game effect is configured to be started at the start of the small hit game (that is, based on the fixed display of the small hit symbol). In other words, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, an effect indicating the small hit game (for example, an effect instructing the player to aim at V) is not performed at the time of the small hit game. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game, and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is definitely displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the small hit game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) starts. ) And the timing (time) from when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed until the big hit game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) starts. . As is clear from the above, a series of effects (expected success effect of V: FIG. 44 (I) → FIG. 45 (A) → FIG. 45 (B)) suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is small. The same content (similar effect) is obtained for a predetermined period from the start of a series of effects in the case of a hit and the case of one type of large hit. The predetermined period is a period that is equal to or longer than the period from the start of the expected success production of V to the end of the small hit game at the time of the small hit winning. For example, when the expected success production time of V is 5 seconds and the small hitting game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. In addition, instead of the expected success production of V: FIG. 44 (I), a success production of V roulette: FIG. 46 (C), and a target success production: FIG. (C)). Here, both the V roulette success production time and the target success production time are 5 seconds.

[Special figure 2 Fluctuating performance at the time of lottery (time saving state)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory view exemplifying a fluctuation effect at the time of drawing the special figure 2. The fluctuation effect at the time of the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time reduction state, at the time of the small hit of the special figure 2, at the time of the big hit of the special figure 2, or at the time of the loss of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), When it is determined from the information on the included fluctuation pattern that the fluctuation pattern is “P16” to “P19” (FIG. 12), the process is executed by setting the corresponding fluctuation effect start command (FIG. 38: Step) S5020).

  In the fluctuating effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46A, a V roulette effect displaying an image GC1 showing a roulette having a loss zone and a V zone rotating is executed. In this case, the display area HR3 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the state of variation of the decorative symbol.

  In the case where the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), after the V roulette effect, the roulette running in the V roulette effect is stopped. A V zone selection effect for displaying an image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone is executed. In the display area HR3, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the symbol arrangement indicating the small hit or one type of big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), a V-roulette success effect of displaying an image GC3 indicating that the big hit game is executed and a right-turning suggestion image GC4 is executed. This V-roulette success production suggests that the V-roulette production is successful and that the expectation of the jackpot (one or two kinds of jackpots) is high, in other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), the V-roulette success effect is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) has elapsed after the symbol arrangement in the display area HR2 is stopped and displayed. Be started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is finally displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the successful V roulette effect is started, and from when the big hit symbol is finally displayed until the successful V roulette effect is started. And the timing (time) is equal. In the case of a small hit, after the successful V roulette effect, a small hit game is executed. When the player passes the V by right-handing, two kinds of big hits are made, and the game shifts to a big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect that indicates that a big hit (two types of big hits) game is executed regardless of whether or not the vehicle has passed V (FIG. 46). (C)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hitting game, the effect indicating the small hitting game or the effect indicating the V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game, and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. In the present embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 46 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the type 1 jackpot and the type 2 jackpot. It should be noted that even if the numbers of the zigzag lines stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is definitely displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination in Toku-zu 2 is a loss, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), after the V roulette effect, the roulette running in the V roulette effect stops, and the stop zone is a loss zone. A loss zone selection effect of displaying an image GC5 indicating that In the display region HR3, a reach state using a decorative symbol is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), a V-roulette failure effect is displayed in which an image GC6 indicating that the V-roulette effect has failed and the jackpot game has not been executed is lost. In the display area HR3, a symbol array indicating loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If the special figure 2 is suspended, the process shifts to the V roulette production again (see FIG. 46A) after the V roulette failure production.

  In the time-saving state, the hit / fail judgment is performed in the special figure 1 and a big hit (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern “P8” is selected) or a small hit (FIG. 12: when the fluctuation pattern “P9” is selected) In the same way as in the case of the big hit or the small hit in the special figure 2, the effects of FIGS. 46 (A) to (C) are executed. In addition, the hit / fail judgment is performed in the special figure 1, and in the case of a loss (FIG. 12: when the variation pattern “P10” is selected), as in the case of the loss in the special figure 2, FIGS. , (E). In addition, in the time saving state, a loss occurs in the determination of the special figure 2 (FIG. 12: when the variation pattern “P19” is selected), or a loss occurs in the determination of the special figure 1 (FIG. 12: the variation pattern). In the case where “P11” is selected), a fluctuating effect of quickly notifying a loss using a decorative symbol is executed.

[Countdown production (when changing working hours)
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown effect. This countdown effect is an effect in which the image of the number of remaining time savings is displayed on the display screen 7a during each variable effect in the time saving state. The countdown effect is started from the first fluctuation of the special symbol in a time-saving state after the jackpot game. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M Is "2", the corresponding variable effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: step S5020). The “number of remaining hours saved” in the countdown effect remaining time saving image is determined by referring to the time saving effect scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time saving effect scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "remaining number of hours saved" indicated by the image is the same as the actual number of remaining hours saved until the time saving state ends (the actual number of remaining fluctuations), or the number of times less than the actual number of remaining hours saved. Is shown as a pseudo time-saving remaining number. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of an effect corresponding to “scenario C”.

  In the countdown effect based on “scenario C”, first, as shown in FIG. 47A, a countdown effect A is displayed. In the countdown effect A, in the first change after the time saving state is reached, the remaining time saving image GDA with the “display remaining number of times” set to 5 is displayed, and from the second change to the fifth change, the previous change is used. An image GDA indicating the number of remaining time savings representing the number of times one is subtracted from the indicated remaining number of time savings is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect A, in the second variation, the image GDA indicating the remaining number of display time reductions in which “the number of remaining display time reductions” is four is displayed, and in the fifth variation, the “number of remaining display time reductions” is set to one. The image GDA of the number of remaining time savings is displayed.

  When the display of the number-of-time-savings-remaining-times image GDA of the fifth change in the countdown effect A ends, next, as shown in FIG. 47B, the charge effect A is executed during the change effect of the fifth change. In the charge effect A, a charge image CHA indicating that the “remaining number of display time savings” is charged (increased) about ten times is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47C, a countdown effect B is executed. In the countdown effect B, at the sixth change, which is the next change of the charge effect A, the charge (10 times) is subtracted by one (0) from the remaining number (1) of the previous change (fifth change). The number of times (10 times) increased by (number of times) is set as the “number of remaining display time savings”, and an image GDB of the remaining number of times saved is displayed. From the 7th variation to the 15th variation, one from the remaining number of times indicated by the previous variation is displayed. A time saving remaining number image GDB representing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect B, in the sixth variation, the image GDB of the remaining number of hours saved with the “remaining number of display hours” set to 10 is displayed, and in the seventh variation, the number of remaining hours of the displayed time reduction is set with nine times. The remaining number-of-times image GDB is displayed, and at the fifteenth change, the remaining number-of-times-savings image GDB with the “remaining number of times of display” set to one is displayed.

  When the display of the number-of-time-save remaining times image GDB at the fifteenth change in the countdown effect B is finished, next, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the charge effect B is executed during the fifteenth change. In the charge effect B, a charge image CHB indicating that the “number of remaining display times” is charged (increased) about 84 times is displayed.

  Next, a countdown effect C is executed as shown in FIG. In the countdown effect C, at the 16th change, which is the next change of the charge effect B, the charge (84) is subtracted by one (0) from the remaining number (1) of the previous change (15th change). The number of times (84 times) increased by “number of times” is displayed as the “remaining number of times to be displayed” image GDC is displayed. From the 17th variation to the 99th variation, one from the remaining number of times indicated by the previous variation is displayed. A time-saving remaining number image GDC representing the number of remaining subtractions is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect C, at the 16th change, the image GDC of the remaining number of hours saved is set to "84", and at the 17th change, the number of remaining hours of display is set to 83 times. The remaining image GDC is displayed.

  The countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each of the time-varying fluctuation effects. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each fluctuation effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each fluctuation effect. Further, during each fluctuation effect, the image of the number of remaining working hours may be continuously displayed.

[One-time production of crying (production of the first change (Special Figure 2) after the end of working hours)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time production of crying. This one-time production of crying is a fluctuation effect that is executed in the next change after the change when the hold of the special figure 2 is held in the last change of the time-saving state, that is, the first change after the time-saving state And the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the special effect flag Is ON, the corresponding fluctuation effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: Step S5020).

  In the one-time production of crying, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), an image GE1 showing a state in which a “target” composed of a hit zone and a losing zone is rotating, and a state advantageous to the player last. A target start effect of displaying an image GE2 indicating that the target is true is executed. In this case, in the display area HR4 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, a variation state of the decorative symbol is shown.

  In the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the hitting start effect, then, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the arrow hits the hit hit zone. A hit effect for displaying the image GE3 indicating the fact is executed. In the display region HR4, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the symbol arrangement indicating the small hit or one type of big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), an image GE4 suggesting that a jackpot game is executed and a right hit suggestion image GE5 prompting a right hit are displayed. A hit success effect that indicates that the degree of expectation of one type of jackpot or two types of jackpot is high, in other words, that the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. Similarly to the expected success production of V (FIG. 44 (I)), this target success production is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) elapses after the zolo-shaped symbol arrangement is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. Be started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is definitely displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the successful hitting effect is started, and from when the big hit symbol is finally displayed until the hitting successful effect is started. And the timing (time) is equal. In the case of a small hit, a small hit game is executed after the successful hitting effect, and the player hits the right to make two kinds of big hits when passing V and shift to a big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect indicating that a big hit (two types of big hits) game is executed regardless of whether or not the vehicle has passed V (FIG. 48). (C)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hitting game, the effect indicating the small hitting game or the effect indicating the V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game, and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. In the present embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 48 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the type 1 jackpot and the type 2 jackpot. It should be noted that even if the numbers of the zigzag lines stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is definitely displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the hit determination in Toku-zu 2 is a loss, the image GE6 indicating that the arrow hits the target loss zone after the hit start effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (D). A target loss effect is displayed. In the display area HR4, a reach state using a decorative symbol is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), a hit-appearance failure effect of displaying an image GE7 indicating that the hit is a failure and the big hit or small hit is lost and the big hit game is not executed as shown in FIG. . In the display area HR4, a symbol array indicating loss is shown using a decorative symbol.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 48 (A) to (C) in the single effect of crying are obtained when the fluctuation pattern P13 (refer to FIG. 12) is selected in the first change from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. The effects shown in FIGS. 48 (A), (D), and (E) show the variation pattern P14 (see FIG. 12) in the first variation that has shifted from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. ) Is an example of an effect that is executed when the item is selected.

9. Operation of Board Movable Body The operation of the board movable body (the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control for operating the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 during a game effect (display effect) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation at the time of turning on the power, and the like, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors. A display / light emission control for causing the light emitting device 15 to emit light in a specific mode is performed.

  The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is an explanatory view illustrating the movement of the first movable auditorium 14 in the advance direction (movement in the advance direction). FIG. 50 is an explanatory view illustrating a second mode of the first movable role object 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a combined effect of the first movable role object 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory view exemplifying a rotation operation of the first movable role object 14. FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are explanatory diagrams exemplifying a light emitting mode of the first movable role object 14.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable role 14 includes a left movable role 14L and a right movable role 14R. The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are configured to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively, and the half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, each of the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion has a half arc shape of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable role 14 is in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable role 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable role 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first mode). At this time, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are partially visible. In the first movable role 14, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in directions approaching each other), as shown in FIG. By moving, at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united to form one decorative member (unified unit) (second mode). Here, the united role forms the contour of the face. In the second aspect, the united material in which the left-side decorative portion and the right-side decorative portion are united covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7 and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the united body is formed so that only the outline of the face is formed, and there is no central portion of the face, and the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined character, thereby completing the human face as a whole. That is, by displaying a missing portion (for example, the center portion of the face) of the united character as an image on the display screen 7a, a combined effect of the character and the image that completes one object (for example, a human face) is achieved. Can be performed. The target completed by the first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to a human face. For example, it may be an entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed with the combined role, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable object 14 can move to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retreating) from the advanced position in FIGS. 50 and 51 through the state in FIG. 49, and stops there. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the united character can be rotated vertically in front of the display screen 7a. That is, the united role can be rotated about an axis parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a as a rotation axis, and can be stopped at an arbitrary inclined angle. At this time, the central opening of the united object gradually becomes an elliptical shape whose vertical direction is narrower when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the face of the person to be displayed is deformed in accordance with the deformation of the opening into an elliptical shape. Thereby, for example, it is possible to perform an effect such that a human face is bowed by the first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable role object 14 is configured to emit light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the united role (decorative member), and each of them is configured to be switchable between ON and OFF. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable movable object 14R can emit light in association with (corresponding to) light emission of the frame lamp 66. As shown in FIG. 54, the right movable role 14R and the left movable role 14L can emit light in conjunction with each other.

  The operation of the second movable role 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view illustrating a second mode of the second movable role object 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory view illustrating the rotation operation of the second movable role object 15. The second movable role 15 includes a rectangular decorative portion described as “OARO”, and is configured to be able to move vertically and horizontally. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable role 15 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role object 15 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. The second movable role object 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 55 (second mode). . In the second aspect, the decoration unit stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover a portion slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, this decorative portion can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (rotate clockwise in the figure) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at an arbitrary inclined angle. The second movable role 15 can move to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1 by moving upward (retreat) from the advanced position in FIGS. 55 and 56, and can stop there.

  With reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, a description will be given of a combination effect of the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a first combination effect by the first movable role object 14 and the second movable role item 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory view exemplifying a second combination effect using the first movable auditors's hand and the second movable auditors's hand. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 can both execute the first combination effect by being in the second mode. That is, both the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 move to the advanced position, so that the second movable role 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable role 14. In other words, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 can be stopped in a partially combined state. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 are placed in the first movable role 15 in a state where the second movable role 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable role 14. A second combination effect in which the movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 are each inclined at a predetermined angle can be performed. In the second combination effect, the first movable effect is formed by rotating (tilting) the two movable characters together, or by moving to the advanced position in an inclined state and overlapping each other. There is a case where the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the one combination effect.

10. Other Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspects of the Present Embodiment Each effect example (display effect example, character movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effects described below are based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, and the like) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted, but is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

  The fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This change timing change effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the fluctuation timing change effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the fluctuation timing change effect, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role are provided. 15 is driven.

[Fluctuating timing change effect A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation timing change effect A. In the fluctuation timing change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 59A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move up and down at high speed. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not the winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, three hold icons 9A are displayed. A black spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first holding display position. A star-shaped holding icon 9A is displayed at the second second holding display position from the right. A white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position at the third position (the leftmost position in this case) from the right. Here, at the third hold display position and the hold display position, a hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon indicates the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, among the three holding icons 9A of a star-shaped holding icon, a black spherical holding icon, and a white spherical holding icon, the star-shaped holding icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical holding icon is 2 The expectation of the hit is the second highest, and the white spherical holding icon has the lowest expectation of the hit.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in a variation in which the white sphere holding icon is the holding display position, the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, and at the same time, two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start the variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are simultaneously stopped and displayed. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively low degree of expectation of winning, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) simultaneously start changing and are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the black sphere holding icon 9A at the first holding display position moves toward the holding display position. At this time, the stop display of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is maintained. As shown in FIG. 59 (D), the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start changing display at the same time as the black sphere holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed with the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continuing to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the suspension icon 9C is a suspension icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the two decorative symbols is not simultaneous and the timing of the stop display is shifted. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively medium expectation degree, two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) are simultaneously started to change. However, the stop display is not at the same time but the timing is shifted. As shown in FIG. 59 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, an effect in which the suspension icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbol starts variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is maintained. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the change display is started before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position, the first decorative symbol starts changing display. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing before the first decorative symbols 21, 8c, and 8r, but may be reversed. In addition, which one starts the change first may be changed every time the change is made (it may be random).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed with the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continuing to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped holding icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of winning, the change start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display of the stop display are determined. Timing shifts. After FIG. 59 (J), the white sphere holding icon 9A at the first holding display position moves toward the holding display position. In the variation in which the white sphere holding icon is the holding display position, as shown in FIG. 59A, the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position and at the same time, the two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start the variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are simultaneously stopped and displayed. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Variation timing change effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the fluctuation timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), three sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not the winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8ml, a middle decorative symbol 8mc, and a right decorative symbol 8mr, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, three hold icons 9A are displayed. A black spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first holding display position. A star-shaped holding icon 9A is displayed at the second second holding display position from the right. A white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position at the third position (the leftmost position in this case) from the right. Here, at the third hold display position and the hold display position, a hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon indicates the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, among the three holding icons 9A of a star-shaped holding icon, a black spherical holding icon, and a white spherical holding icon, the star-shaped holding icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical holding icon is 2 The expectation of the hit is the second highest, and the white spherical holding icon has the lowest expectation of the hit.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in a variation in which the white sphere holding icon is the holding display position, the holding icon of the white sphere reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, and at the same time, three decoration symbols ( The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) start the variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. You. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical reserve icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start to change at the same time. Is displayed at the same time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the black sphere holding icon 9A at the first holding display position moves toward the holding display position. At this time, the stop display of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) is maintained. As shown in FIG. 60 (D), at the same time when the black ball holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position, the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. To start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), with the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr continuing to fluctuate, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r. Is stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. That is, when the holding icon 9C is a black sphere holding icon, the stop display of the three decorative symbols is not simultaneous, and the stop timing of the first decorative symbol is the stop timing of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol. It is configured to be out of timing. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stop-displayed before the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). Further, the timings at which the three decorative symbols stop may differ from each other. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively medium expectation of hit, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed. On the other hand, the timing of the stop display is not simultaneous, but the timing is shifted at least partially. As shown in FIG. 60 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, an effect in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A located at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is maintained. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start changing display before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position. I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position, the first decorative symbol starts changing display. In the present embodiment, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start changing before the first decorative symbol, but may be reversed. In addition, which one starts the change first may be changed every time the change is made (it may be random). Further, the timings at which the three decorative symbols start to change may be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the first decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r are stopped and displayed while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. You. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol), but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). Further, the timings at which the three decorative symbols stop may differ from each other. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped holding icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of winning, at least a part of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol). , The fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are shifted from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), at the same time when the holding icon of the white ball reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, three decoration symbols (first decoration symbol, second decoration symbol, and third decoration symbol) are displayed. Start variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. You. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Fluctuating timing change effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation timing change effect C. 61 (A) and 61 (B) of the fluctuation timing change effect C are the same as FIGS. 60 (F) and 60 (G) of the fluctuation timing change effect B. That is, before the variation timing change effect C shown in FIG. 61A, the processes in FIGS. 60A to 60E are executed. In FIG. 61 (A), after the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed with a delay. . The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not the winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8ml, a middle decorative symbol 8mc, and a right decorative symbol 8mr, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. At this time, an effect is executed in which the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (on the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears). In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, two hold icons 9A are displayed. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first hold display position. A white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the second (in this case, the leftmost) second holding display position from the right. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon indicates the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, among the three holding icons 9A of a star-shaped holding icon, a black spherical holding icon, and a white spherical holding icon, the star-shaped holding icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical holding icon is 2 The expectation of the hit is the second highest, and the white spherical holding icon has the lowest expectation of the hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the star-shaped holding icon 9A located at the first holding display position moves toward the holding display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is maintained. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start changing display before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position. I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the second movable role 15 advances downward and stops in the second mode, and then moves to the retreat position (first mode). The first decorative symbol disappears from the display with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 without starting to change. This suggests that the pseudo continuous production starts. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are variably displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. Further, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are variably displayed. You. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit point “555”. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same hit points as the second decorative symbol.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the fluctuation timing change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), FIGS. 60 (D) to (H), and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), the first decorative symbol is After the stop display, the first effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first effect, in a state in which the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display, the second decorative symbol is changed to the next one. And a second effect of starting the variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), in the second effect, before the holding icon arrives at the holding display position by the shift movement, the holding icon is added to the holding icon in the second decorative symbol. The corresponding fluctuation is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to (H) and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display in a state where the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 (H) to (J), (A), and FIGS. 61 (H) to (J), (A), after the first effect, the second , The third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), FIGS. 60 (D) to (H), and FIGS. After the first effect, a second effect is performed. When the hold icon has a white spherical shape, a third effect is performed after the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the fluctuation timing change effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
The first variation in FIGS. 59A and 59B, the second variation in FIGS. 59C to 59F, and the third variation in FIGS. 59G to 60J are executed in any order. May be done. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Further, the same type of variation may be repeatedly executed. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of the hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be set arbitrarily. As long as the first decorative symbol 21, the second decorative symbol 8 </ b> L, and the third decorative symbol 8 ml are symbols displayed on the image display device 7, the type, shape, and display method of the symbol are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
In the first decorative symbol 21, the second decorative symbol 8 </ b> L, and the third decorative symbol 8 ml, the mode of the variable display indicating the change is not limited to the above. For example, the variable display may be a mode that is not displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the numbers may be displayed in such a manner that the numbers move at a high speed and the numbers cannot be distinguished, or may move at a distinguishable speed. Further, the fluctuation speed may change on the way.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative symbol starts to change when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be immediately before or immediately after that. Here, “immediately before and immediately after” means, for example, a range of a few seconds before and after.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit has occurred,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved,
A first effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display in a state where the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second effect, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement, a change corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1 or Aspect A1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative symbols that can notify whether or not a hit has occurred,
In the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed,
In the second effect, in a state where the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4 according to Aspect A1-2,
When the hold icon is in the first mode, after the first effect, the second effect is performed,
When the hold icon is in the second mode, after the first effect, the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The symbol direction change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. The design direction change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a symbol direction change effect, the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors are included. 15 is driven.

[Symbol direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the symbol direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 62A, the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, although the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, they are not visible. The left decorative design 8L enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally to the left and downward. At this time, each numeral constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined rightward. That is, each number is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed with the traveling direction (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, “2”) temporarily stops at a first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. Note that the specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction (posture) of this specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific numbers (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative design 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move in the vertical direction (straight) while moving to the second upper left position on the display screen 7a. The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction, and at the third position. Stopped and displayed. . The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a changing state, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed in a direction different from the fluctuation direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific numeral (the right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a portion above a specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction of the specific image CHA is also inclined like the specific number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific numeral (the right decorative design 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed. In other words, the change of the middle decoration symbol 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a different direction from the changing direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C moves in a state (a straight state) in which the direction (posture) of the numeral is along the vertical direction. In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed with the traveling direction (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific numeral (intermediate decorative pattern 8C), but is stopped and displayed. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Symbol direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the symbol direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, although the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, they are not visible. The left decorative design 8L enters the frame near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally right and downward. At this time, each numeral constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, “2”) temporarily stops at a first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. Note that the specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction (posture) of this specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific numbers (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (left decorative design 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative design 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move in the vertical direction (straight) while moving to the second upper left position on the display screen 7a. The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the specific numeral (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction, and move to the third position. Is stopped and displayed. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

  In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a changing state, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. That is, it is variably displayed in the same fluctuation direction as the left decoration symbol 8L. At this time, each numeral constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L moves while being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number at the time of the change. Each numeral is tilted in the direction along the direction of change, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific numeral (the right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a portion above a specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction of the specific image CHA is also inclined like the specific number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific numeral (the right decorative design 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Is done. With the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed. In other words, the change of the middle decoration symbol 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally right and downward. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the same fluctuation direction as the fluctuation direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number when changing. Each numeral is tilted in the direction along the direction of change, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C), and it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the specific number. The direction (posture) of the specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (I), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (interior decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), the specific number (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Is done. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Symbol direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the symbol direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 64A, the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, although the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, they are not visible. The left decorative design 8L enters the frame near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally right and downward. At this time, each numeral constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, “2”) temporarily stops at a first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a specific image CHA is displayed below the specific numeral (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. Note that the specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets. The specific image CHA covers a part below a specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), making it difficult to visually recognize a part of the specific number. The direction (posture) of this specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific numbers (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (left decorative design 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative design 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move in the vertical direction (straight) while moving to the second upper left position on the display screen 7a. The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction, and move to the third position. Stopped and displayed. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

  In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a changing state, but is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. That is, it is variably displayed in the same fluctuation direction as the left decoration symbol 8L. At this time, each numeral constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L moves while being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number at the time of the change. Each numeral is tilted in the direction along the direction of change, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), a specific image CHA is displayed below the specific numeral (the right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part below a specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction of the specific image CHA is also inclined like the specific number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific numeral (the right decorative design 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the specific numeral (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64H, the display is stopped at that position. After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed. In other words, the change of the middle decoration symbol 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a different direction from the changing direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C moves in a state (a straight state) in which the direction (posture) of the numeral is along the vertical direction. In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed with the traveling direction (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C), but is stopped and displayed. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the design direction change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and (B), the left decorative pattern is oriented in the first direction and is oriented in the first direction (for example, diagonally right). After the first effect variably displayed in the (direction) and the first effect, as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (E), the left decorative symbol differs from the first direction in the second direction ( (For example, a vertical direction), and a second effect that is stopped and displayed in a direction along the vertical direction). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol reaches the first position in a direction along a first direction (for example, a diagonal right direction). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the direction moves along the second direction (for example, the vertical direction) while moving toward the second position located vertically above the first position. After reaching the second position, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the third position located vertically below the second position while maintaining the direction along the second direction is maintained. Move towards the position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B) and (C), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol moves toward the second position after reaching the first position. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part of the image by the specific image CHA. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), after the second effect, the right decorative symbol is newly changed from the non-displayed state to the first direction (eg, a diagonally right direction). 63G, after the third effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the right decorative symbol moves along the second direction. And the fourth effect stopped and displayed in the wrong direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), after the fourth effect, the orientation of the middle decorative pattern along a third direction (for example, a vertical direction) different from the first direction. Thus, a fifth effect that is variably displayed in the direction along the third direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a vertical direction. Is the direction along. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the symbol direction change effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
Although the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are specific numbers, they need not be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L bounces after the change display and becomes a direction along the vertical direction. However, if the direction is different from the change direction, the left decorative pattern 8L may be in a direction other than the vertical direction. Good. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed by leaning to the left or sideways after the bouncing. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed after changing display without changing its direction without bouncing.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C, the right decorative symbol may be visually recognizable (variable display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol stops, or after the left decorative symbol stops, The change may be visible (the change display is displayed). The same applies to the middle decorative pattern.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be appropriately combined. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set as the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the change direction and the stop mode of the middle decoration symbol may be set as the symbol direction change effect C.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in a direction along the first direction in a direction along the first direction;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the second effect, after the first decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction, the second decorative symbol is located on one side in the vertical direction from the first position. While moving toward the position, the direction becomes the direction along the second direction. After reaching the second position, the direction is more vertical than the second position while maintaining the direction along the second direction. Move toward a third position located on the other side of the direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or Aspect A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
In the second effect, when the first decorative pattern moves toward the second position after arriving at the first position, a part of the first decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize due to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design that constitutes a set of decorative designs that can notify whether or not a hit has been made, together with the first decorative design,
After the second effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which the second decorative pattern is newly displayed in a direction along the first direction from a state in which the second decorative pattern is not displayed in a third direction along the first direction. Production and
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the direction along the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative design that constitutes a set of decorative designs capable of informing whether or not a hit has been made, together with the first decorative design,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol is variably displayed in a direction along the third direction different from the first direction and in a direction along the third direction. Executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display unit,
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the accessory design coordination effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This accessory design coordination effect can be executed, for example, during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the accessory design coordination effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory design coordination effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory are included. The object 15 is driven.

[Combined character design effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for describing the accessory design coordination effect A. The accessory design coordination effect A is one of the fluctuation pattern effects including the pseudo coordination effect, and FIGS. 65 (A) to (J) are executed with one change. In the accessory design coordination effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner of moving vertically at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), a pseudo continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, the second movable role 15 moves downward (advance) from the retreat position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a, and a part of the display screen 7a. Stop at the forward advance position covering the. The shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a changes (deforms) with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the advanced position. Here, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role object 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed by being crushed by the second movable role 15 and distorted. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15, the player does not confirm the stopped and displayed symbols, and changes are performed again. That is, the pseudo run is executed. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, “OARO”) that are the same as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific object (character, graphic, symbol, or the like) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable auditory piece 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which indicates that the effect is special to the player. It can impress and enhance the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the fluctuation display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo continuous continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (G) is executed. The pseudo-sequence continuation suggestion effect is the same effect as the pseudo-serial start suggestion effect described above. That is, the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position. With the movement to the advanced position, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed by being crushed by the second movable role 15 and distorted. In addition, the mode of deformation | transformation may differ from the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, “OARO”) that are the same as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific object (character, graphic, symbol, or the like) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the variable display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, stop display is performed in a jackpot manner.

[Combined character design effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory design coordination effect B. The character design cooperation effect B is one of the fluctuation pattern effects including the pseudo continuous effect, and FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B) show the previous one fluctuation, and FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (J) show the fluctuation patterns. This is the following one variation including pseudo continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 66A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation mode in which the first decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including a fixed stop display). At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 66C, the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, among the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the change display is started before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position.

  Next, a pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, first, in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r continue to fluctuate, the first decoration that continues to be stopped at the last determined stop display “123”. The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily disappears, and instead, a pseudo continuous start suggestion display of “Go !!!!” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the second movable role 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed. It stops at the forward position where it covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo continuous start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R again displayed on the display screen 7a change shape (deformation) as the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position. I do. Here, the shape of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R gradually collapses in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are deformed by being crushed by the second movable role 15 and distorted. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and changes are performed again. It can be noticed that the pseudo run is executed. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, “OARO”) that are the same as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific object (character, graphic, symbol, or the like) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, while the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. It is possible to impress that, and to improve the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, 8r continue to perform the variable display. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variably displayed state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped (including the temporary stop display) while the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, 8r continue to fluctuate. ), And then, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R again start the variable display. That is, a pseudo continuous production is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, stop display is performed in a jackpot manner.

[Combined character design effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory design coordination effect C. The official figure design coordination effect C is one of the fluctuation pattern effects including the pseudo co-production, and FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B) show the previous one fluctuation, and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J) show the fluctuation patterns. This is the following one variation including pseudo continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 67A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation mode in which the first decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped (including a fixed stop display). At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, among the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the change display is started before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position.

  Next, a pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, first, in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r continue to fluctuate, the first decoration that continues to be stopped at the last determined stop display “123”. The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily disappears, and instead, a pseudo continuous start suggestion display of “Go !!!!” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the second movable role 15 moves (advance) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed. A part of the screen 7a is covered and a rotation operation is executed at that position. As a result, after the pseudo-sequence start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change in shape as the second movable role 15 moves downward and rotates. (Deform. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are cracked and the shape is gradually crushed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are crushed by the second movable role 15 and are deformed and cracked. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15, the stopped displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is changed again. It can be noticed that it is executed, that is, the pseudo-run is executed. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in the state where the second movable auditorium 15 has returned to the retracted position, the same character (that is, “OARO”) as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 is largely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. . Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific object (character, graphic, symbol, or the like) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player with a special effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), re-variable display of both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), in a state where the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to fluctuate, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop display (including temporary stop display). ), And then, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R again start the variable display. That is, a pseudo continuous production is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, stop display is performed in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the accessory design coordination effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (G), After the first effect, the second effect in which the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display screen 7a. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), in the second effect, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are distorted as the second movable role 15 moves. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the second movable role 15 has a decorative portion represented as “OARO”. As shown, after the second effect, a third effect in which “OARO” is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J), the first effect and the second effect change during one change. In the first effect, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a mode in which it is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (G) to (J), a pseudo continuous effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) and 67 (C), one of a plurality of types of images has a second pattern different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a decorative pattern, and in the first effect, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification example of the accessory design coordination effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the role design A, the processes from FIG. 65 (A) to (J) are executed with one change. However, FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (B) and FIGS. 65 (C) to 65 (J) may have different variations. In addition, in the character design coordination effects B and C, FIGS. 66 (A) to (B) and FIGS. 67 (A) to (B) change by one, and FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIG. (C) to (J) are assumed to be the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (A) to (J) may be executed with one change.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of the decorative pattern illustrated in the role-design cooperative effects A to C are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative pattern when the second movable auditory 15 advances is not limited to a distorted mode. For example, the decorative pattern may be collapsed and fall apart, or may be reduced in size with the same shape.

[Modification 3]
In the role symbol design coordination effect A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but may not be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. While the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed, the changed display may temporarily disappear, or may not be continuously displayed. Here, the variable display means a state in which the changing mode is displayed so as to be visible.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the accessory design coordination effects A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, in FIG. 66 (E) of the accessory design coordination effect B, the effect of FIG. 67 (E) of the accessory design coordination effect C may be performed. In addition, for example, in the pseudo-sequence effect of FIG. 66 (G) to (J) of the character-design cooperative effect B, a pseudo-sequence effect of the character-design cooperative effect A may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
And a movable role movable in front of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the shape of the decorative symbol changes as the movable character moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display means can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
In the second effect, the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted as the movable role moves.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or Aspect A3-2,
The movable accessory has a decorative portion in which a specific object is represented,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific target is displayed on the display means can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-3,
After the third performance, a pseudo continuous performance is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
The first effect and the second effect are executed during one change,
In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the first effect is stopped and displayed after a change immediately before the change to be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern,
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This specific image symbol cooperative effect can be executed during a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperative effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific image symbol cooperative effect, the first movable object 14 and the second movable The object 15 is driven.

[Specific image design coordination effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for describing the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner of moving vertically at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display) at the outlying "123". The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, “arranged along the horizontal direction” includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, all of those that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, a pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. Note that the specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. The term "reciprocate in the horizontal direction" as used herein includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move substantially horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, "the image is displayed on the front side" with respect to another image is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. That is, specifically, a state in which images are displayed without missing in an overlapping portion of two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and a state in which the images are missing and displayed in the overlapping portion of the two images. , An image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to another image.

  The specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as shown in FIG. 68 (D) due to the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof, as shown in FIG. As shown in (E), an effect is provided in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and reciprocates horizontally in the back side. Due to the reciprocating movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap and are displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 68 (G), an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually thinned in a state in which the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and gradually. Recognition becomes difficult (fade out). This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. It can be noticed that the pseudo run is executed. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R again start the variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, stop display is performed in a jackpot manner.

[Specific image design coordination effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for describing the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the variable display are displayed at the outlying “789”. Stop display (including temporary stop display) is performed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed.

  Thereafter, the pseudo consecutive suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and (C) are executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. I do. The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. Note that the specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number of specific targets can be specified when there are a plurality of specific targets.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. The term "reciprocate in the horizontal direction" as used herein includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move substantially horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, "the image is displayed on the front side" with respect to another image is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. That is, specifically, a state in which images are displayed without missing in an overlapping portion of two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and a state in which the images are missing and displayed in the overlapping portion of the two images. , An image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to another image.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R due to the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof and the specific image. As shown in FIG. 68 (E) of the symbol cooperation effect A, an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and reciprocates horizontally on the back side. The reciprocating movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the back side overlaps both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L as shown in FIG. 69 (C) and is displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 68 (F) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually thinned in a state in which the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and gradually. Recognition becomes difficult (fade out). This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. It can be noticed that the pseudo run is executed. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R again start the variable display. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner of moving vertically at high speed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, stop display is performed in a jackpot manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot determination suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been determined, and in this case, the characters “Done!” Are displayed. Here, two jackpot determination suggestion images CHB are displayed. The specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB are both newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the big hit. The specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB are both displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the big hit determination suggestion image CHB is displayed in front of the specific image CHA. In this way, a plurality of images overlap with each other to produce a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, thereby improving the interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA overlaps with the decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R in which the specific image CHA is stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. To reciprocate. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is continuously displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L by reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), and is displayed on the front side thereof, and FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that overlaps with both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R and repeats the aspect displayed on the front side is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and reciprocates horizontally in the back side. As shown in FIG. 69 (H), the reciprocating movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the rear side overlaps both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is displayed on the rear side thereof. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (I) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually thinned in a state in which the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and gradually. Recognition becomes difficult (fade out). This allows the player to notice that the stop-displayed big-eye hit decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see, so that the big hit game is started thereafter. Thereby, the improvement of interest can be aimed at. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), a right-hit image MGU is displayed, and thereafter a big hit game is executed.

[Specific image design coordination effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for describing the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70A, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a manner of moving vertically at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed. The specific image CHA is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that are variably displayed. The specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves to a position overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed. The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. Note that the specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. In other words, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number of specific targets can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction in a state where the specific image CHA overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that are variably displayed. The term "reciprocate in the horizontal direction" as used herein includes not only those that move strictly in the horizontal direction but also those that move substantially horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, "the image is displayed on the front side" with respect to another image is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. That is, specifically, a state in which images are displayed without missing in an overlapping portion of two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and a state in which the images are missing and displayed in the overlapping portion of the two images. , An image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to another image.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is reduced, and starts to fluctuate (move) in the up and down direction in a state where the numbers are visible. . Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps a plurality of moving numeric images constituting the left decorative symbol 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeral image forming the left decorative pattern 8L.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is reduced, and starts to fluctuate (move) in the up and down direction in a state where the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, the left decorative symbol 8L has its fluctuation speed further reduced, and is stopped and displayed at a specific number (here, “1”). Since the specific image CHA continues the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps a plurality of moving numeric images constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. Also, it overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeral image forming the right decorative symbol 8R. Also, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the fluctuation speed of the middle decoration pattern 8C among the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is reduced, and starts to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction in a state where the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the fluctuation speed is further reduced, and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at a specific number (here, “7”). Since the specific image CHA continues the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps with a plurality of moving numeric images constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C. Also, it overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeric image constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, it is displayed on the front side of each of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the outlier “167”, a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA changes is executed. Here, an effect of increasing the specific image CHA is performed as one of the change effects, but the mode of the change is not limited to this. For example, the specific image CHA may change to a different image content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. By this change effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the outlier will change again, thereby improving the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a multiple effect in which a plurality of specific images CHA are displayed is executed. Here, as one of the plurality of effects, an effect of additionally displaying one new specific image CHA is performed, but the mode of the plurality is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific images CHA may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. The newly added specific image CHA is reciprocating on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed. This pluralization effect can further increase the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the outliers will change again, thereby improving the interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), an effect is performed in which the two specific images CHA are framed out. Here, one of the two specific images CHA moves upward, the other moves downward, and simultaneously goes out of the frame. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), a pseudo-link suggestion image NKM indicating that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started (start of the pseudo-link) is displayed. Here, the pseudo-run suggestion image NKM shows characters of “second time !!” indicating the number of times of the pseudo run. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), when the pseudo consecutive suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variably manner.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the specific image symbol cooperation effect will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to (E), the first effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, As shown in FIGS. 68 (F) to 68 (G), after the first effect, the second effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be executed. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to (G), in the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are provided with a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R that can notify whether or not a hit has occurred. In the first effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA is one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the image is superimposed and displayed on at least one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to (G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to visually entertain the player, thereby improving the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), in the first effect, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image CHA is not displayed. 68 (C) to (D), the specific image CHA includes an effect of being newly displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R by frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), after the second effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to visually recognize due to fade-out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the specific image symbol cooperation effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to be simultaneously overlapped with the two symbol images. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap only one symbol image, or may simultaneously overlap three symbol images.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the specific image CHA moves in the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may draw an arc or meander. Further, it may move left and right while swinging in the vertical direction. Further, it may be stopped halfway.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but may not be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. While the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed, the changed display may temporarily disappear, or may not be continuously displayed. Here, the variable display means a state in which the changing mode is displayed so as to be visible.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, after FIGS. 68 (A) to (I), FIGS. 70 (A) to (J) may be executed. For example, after FIGS. 70 (A) to (J), FIGS. 69 (D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
A first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol;
A second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern after the first effect, and
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
In the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-2,
The decorative design includes a plurality of design images that can notify whether or not a hit,
In the first effect, after the specific image is displayed so as to overlap one or more of the plurality of symbol images, it is displayed so as to overlap another one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-3,
In the first effect, the symbol images are stopped and displayed side by side in a first direction, and the specific image reciprocates along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first effect includes an effect in which the decorative image is stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image is not displayed, and then the specific image is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol by frame-in. Yes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to visually recognize due to fade-out,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The decorative design mode change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative design mode change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the decorative design mode change effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decoration design mode change effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol mode change effect A. In the decorative design mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design change effect is provided by a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. (Variation display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. It should be noted that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not temporarily disappear after the high-speed variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc such that the left decorative symbol 8L bends rightward from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slow. It is displayed while changing. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed smaller gradually as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L further decreases, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the numeral “9” in the present embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the previous numeral “9” changes. Specifically, from the mode of the image of the number “9”, the image of the number “9” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “9”. It changes to the aspect. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbols 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to turn leftward from the back side to the near side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowing down. It is displayed while fluctuating. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R further decreases, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the numeral “5” in the present embodiment) becomes the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be one, or may be plural.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), after the right decorative pattern 8R is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the aforementioned number “5” changes. Specifically, from the aspect of the image of the number “5”, the image of the number “5” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “5”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), an effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while being variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. It should be noted that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be gradually displayed larger or may be displayed smaller gradually with the movement.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the moving speed of the middle decoration pattern 8C further decreases, and one of the middle decoration patterns 8C (the image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) becomes the middle decoration pattern. 8C rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “3” changes. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number “3” is slightly smaller than the image of the number “3”, and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “3”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C other than the middle display pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decoration design mode change effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol mode change effect B. In the decorative design mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design change effect (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R) ( (Variation display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. It should be noted that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not temporarily disappear after the high-speed variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variably manner while moving along a linear trajectory in a diagonally upper left direction from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed decreases. . At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed smaller gradually as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L further decreases, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the numeral “9” in the present embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), after the left decorative symbol 8L is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the previous numeral “9” changes. Specifically, from the mode of the image of the number “9”, the image of the number “9” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “9”. It changes to the aspect. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbols 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears. More specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variably manner while moving along a linear trajectory in a diagonally lower left direction from the back side to the near side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowing down. . That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R further decreases, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the numeral “5” in the present embodiment) becomes the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. The rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be one, or may be plural.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), after the right decorative pattern 8R is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the aforementioned number “5” changes. Specifically, from the aspect of the image of the number “5”, the image of the number “5” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “5”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), an effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while being variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. It should be noted that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be gradually displayed larger or may be displayed smaller gradually with the movement.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C further decreases, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) becomes the middle decorative pattern. 8C rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), the mode of the image of the above-mentioned number “3” changes after the middle decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number “3” is slightly smaller than the image of the number “3”, and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “3”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C other than the middle display pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decoration design mode change effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol mode change effect C. In the decorative design mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, the decorative design change effect (left decorative pattern 8 L, middle decorative pattern 8 C, and right decorative pattern 8 R) is performed. (Variation display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. It should be noted that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not temporarily disappear after the high-speed variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc such that the left decorative symbol 8L bends rightward from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slow. It is displayed while changing. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed smaller gradually as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L is further reduced, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the numeral “9” in the present embodiment) is the left decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the numeral “9” of the left decorative symbol 8L changes from blue to red. The color of the left decorative pattern 8L may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the mode of the image of the red numeral “9” is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the red number “9” is slightly smaller than the image of the red number “9” and the lower right of the image of the red number “9” from the mode of the image of the red number “9”. The image changes to a mode in which the image of the character is attached. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbols 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved orbit that draws an arc so as to turn leftward from the back side to the near side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slowing down. It is displayed while fluctuating. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R further decreases, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the numeral “5” in this embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number “5” of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from blue to red. The color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any color, and the color may be changed from any color to any color.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), in the right decorative pattern 8R, the mode of the image of the red number “5” is changed. Specifically, from the aspect of the image of the red number “5”, the image of the red number “5” is slightly smaller than the image of the red number “5”, and at the lower right of the image of the red number “5”. The image changes to a mode in which the image of the character is attached. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while being variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. It should be noted that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be gradually displayed larger or may be displayed smaller gradually with the movement.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is further reduced, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) is a medium decorative pattern. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number “3” of the middle decorative symbol 8C changes from blue to red. The color of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be any color, and the color may be changed from any color to any color.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the mode of the image of the above-mentioned red numeral “3” changes. Specifically, from the mode of the image of the red number “3”, the middle decorative pattern 8C is slightly smaller in the image of the red number “3” and at the lower right of the image of the red number “3”. The image changes to a mode in which the image of the character is attached. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C other than the middle display pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as a loss mode (loss symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed in the first mode (for example, numbers), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. The display is changed from the first mode to the second mode (for example, numbers and characters), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in the horizontal direction at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8 </ b> L is variably displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative symbol 8 </ b> R is different from the left decorative symbol 8 </ b> L. It is displayed fluctuating while moving along different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed while being fluctuated while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. It fluctuates while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed smaller with the movement, and the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger with the movement. You. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the decorative design mode change effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed while being moved in different directions, but the movement of two decorative symbols among the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be variably displayed while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be variably displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. .
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R other than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the stop display position disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative symbol 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position is displayed so as to remain without disappearing. Is also good.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in a first mode (for example, numbers and the like), and change from the first mode to a second mode (for example, numbers and characters). The image is displayed in the second mode, and is stopped and displayed in the second mode. The mode in this case includes various modes such as, for example, the type, color, and shape of the image representing the decorative pattern. Any mode may be changed to any mode. The number of changes may be one or more.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variably displayed in this order, changed from the first mode to the second mode, and stopped and displayed. The order of change, stop display, and the like is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a first mode;
A second effect in which the decorative symbol is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect and displayed,
A third effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first mode to the second mode at a stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1 or Aspect A5-2,
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed while moving along the first direction,
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the display is variably displayed while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first effect is displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc,
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the display is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4 or Aspect A5-5,
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol is gradually reduced in size with movement,
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is gradually enlarged with movement.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The decorative symbol change area effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative design change area effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the decorative design variable area effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorated design fluctuation area effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol variation area effect A. In the decorative design change area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8 L, the middle decorative design 8 C, and the right decorative design 8 R are lost. Symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display region R1 is provided in a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the first display region R1, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern is left. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically aligned with the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. The left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the left decorative pattern 8L.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). Then, while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, whether or not to form the reach state in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol “3”). Produces reach reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol “3” symbol) moves downward without stopping at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. . That is, the reach state is not formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative symbol 8R. Note that the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and the reach state is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). If so, another reach production may be performed from there.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and The display is stopped at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative symbol 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol “2” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically shifted from the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper central portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the middle decoration pattern 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually decreasing (reducing).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R further gradually decrease from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display region R1. In this manner, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol).

[Decorated design fluctuation area effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol change area effect B. In the decorative design change area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8 L, the middle decorative design 8 C, and the right decorative design 8 R are lost. Symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display region R1 is provided in a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), in the first display region R1, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern is left. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically aligned with the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. The left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the left decorative pattern 8L having transparency.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). Then, while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, whether or not to form the reach state in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol “3”). Produces reach reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) moves downward without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. . That is, the reach state is not formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative symbol 8R. Note that the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and the reach state is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). If so, another reach production may be performed from there.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and The display is stopped at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the right decorative pattern 8R having transparency.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8 </ b> C which has once disappeared appears. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol “2” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically shifted from the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper central portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the middle decorative pattern 8C having transparency.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), in the second display region R2, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been stopped and displayed, disappear from the second display region R2, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The design 8L, the middle decoration design 8C, and the right decoration design 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have disappeared again appear again. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a reduced state in the first display region R1. In this manner, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol).

[Decoration pattern change area effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol change area effect C. In the decorative design change area effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8 L, the middle decorative design 8 C, and the right decorative design 8 R are lost. Symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display region R1 is provided in a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the first display region R1, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern is left. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically aligned with the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. The left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the left decorative pattern 8L.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). Then, while slowly moving downward slightly above the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, whether or not to form the reach state in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol “3”). Produces reach reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. Thus, the reach state is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol) and the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative symbol 8R. After the reach state is formed, another reach effect may be performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), an effect is executed in which the temporarily decorated middle decoration pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol “2” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically shifted from the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. Also, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper central portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the middle decoration pattern 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually decreasing (reducing).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R further decrease gradually from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display region R1. In this manner, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design change area effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the first display area R1 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, After the first effect in which 8R is variably displayed, and after the first effect, in the second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed. , 8C, and 8R can be executed in a larger manner than in the first effect, and the second effect is variably displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in an enlarged and fluctuating manner are in the first display region R1. Is displayed overlapping with. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the first display region R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 in a variable manner. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after the second effect, in the second display region R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state. It is possible to further execute a third effect to perform. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach in the second display region R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is possible to further execute the fourth effect in which the state is not formed and the stop effect is displayed in a lost symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the second display region R2 to the first display region R1 while being reduced. It is possible to further execute a fifth effect that is displayed to be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative symbol variation area effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the decorative symbol change area effects A to C, the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 has a rectangular shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The shape may be an elliptical shape, a square shape, or the like. Further, the shape of the second display region R2 can also adopt various shapes. Further, the second display region R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the decorative symbol change region effects A to C, at least a part of the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to overlap the first display region R1. , May be displayed so as not to overlap the first display region R1. For example, the display may be performed so as to fit within the second display region R2.
[Modification 3]
74 to 76, in the decorative symbol change region effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8 </ b> L, 8 </ b> C, and 8 </ b> R are displayed in an enlarged and varied manner in the reach-inducing effect of whether or not to reach the reach state. In various effects, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed in an enlarged manner.
[Modification 4]
74 to 76, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. However, the order of the stop display is not limited to this, and any order is possible. Is also good.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in a first area of the display means;
A second effect in which, after the first effect, in the second area including the first area in the display means, the decorative symbol is displayed in a larger and fluctuating manner than in the first effect; Is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1,
In the second effect, at least a part of the decorative pattern that is displayed in an enlarged and fluctuating manner is displayed so as to overlap the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1 or Aspect A6-2,
In the first effect, after the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first area of the display means, the decorative symbol disappears from the first area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether the decorative symbol forms a reach state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the decorative symbol forms a reach state in the second region of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a fourth effect in which the decorative symbol does not form a reach state and is stopped and displayed in a lost symbol in the second region of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-6,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further execute a fifth effect in which the decorative symbol is displayed so as to move while reducing from the second area to the first area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The operation promoting effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation promoting effect can be executed during the changing effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the operation promoting effect is included, and reads out the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation promotion effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for describing the operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), a size change effect is executed. The size change effect is an effect in which the size of the button image BG is increased and displayed. This suggests the expectation of the jackpot. Here, the friend character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect in which a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG as an axis.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), a press-promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG “press” is also displayed.

  When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, a message image MG indicating “Victory” is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, the friend character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect in which a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG as an axis.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG “press” is also displayed.

  When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, a message image MG indicating “Victory” is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for describing the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game. In addition, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in a lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”. Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the color of the upper surface of the button image BG. For example, the upper surface of white is changed to blue, green, and red. This suggests the expectation of the jackpot. Here, the friend character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. The rotation of the button image BG is continued.

  When the player presses the effect button 63, a press promoting effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (G). In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG “press” is also displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (losing), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8". Note that a message image MG indicating “defeat” is also displayed, which also indicates that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Note that the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may shift to the final stop effect (loss) in FIG. 79 (H).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation promotion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the image is rotated as indicated by an arrow YG with the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an axis (FIG. 77 ( E), FIG. 78 (E) and FIG. 79 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the whole does not fit on the display screen 7a, and there are portions that are not displayed at the ends (FIGS. 77 (F), 78 (F), 79 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge to the other peripheral edge of the display screen 7a so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a press promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG of "press" is also displayed (FIGS. 77 (G), 78 (G), 79 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect in which the button image BG is displayed is first performed (FIGS. 77 (C) (D), 78 (C), 79 (A) to (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the effect button 63 prior to the operation of the effect button 63, which contributes to the enhancement of interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may shift to the fixed stop effect (losing) shown in FIG. 79 (H). That is, after the effect for displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the press promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of effects can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation promotion effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects. However, any of the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
Although the above is an example of the effect in the fluctuation during the time reduction game, the present invention may be applied to the fluctuation in the normal game in which the player hits left.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, a size change effect (FIG. 77 (D)) and a color change effect (FIG. 79 (D)) were performed. Such a size change effect and color change effect may be performed, for example, when a game ball is entered. For example, it is conceivable that the timing is when the second special map reservation has increased. Further, for example, it is conceivable to set the timing of over-winning.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
In the operation promoting effect of promoting the operation of the operation unit, an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is displayed on a display screen as an image of the operation unit viewed from a predetermined direction, and rotated about the predetermined direction as an axis. Rotation effects included,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The operation promoting effect includes an enlarged effect in which the entire operation unit image does not fit on the display screen and its end is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B1-1 or Aspect B1-2,
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral portion to the other peripheral portion so as to cross the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The operation promotion effect includes displaying the operation unit image, and includes a promotion effect that prompts pressing of the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After a display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed in a display screen, the display shifts to the operation promoting effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
Even if the display effect is executed, there is a case where it does not shift to the operation promoting effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B1-5 or Aspect B1-6,
In the display effect, suggesting a jackpot expectation degree, triggered by the ball entering a predetermined entrance of the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7,
The display effect is executed from the start of the change of the effect design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The omission notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This omission notification effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the omission notification effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Achievement announcement A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the omission notification effect A.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started, a battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, two button images BG are obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA fights with the enemy character CRB. Here, an effect is produced in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked. In addition, the stock number of the button images BG indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), a press promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the press promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Also, a stock button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), a press-promotion effect (final period) is executed. In the press promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG “press” is displayed above the button image BG. Also, a stock button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top. The press promotion effect (end) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background of the jackpot determination.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Our announcement B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the omission notification effect B.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started, a battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, two button images BG are obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA fights with the enemy character CRB. Here, an effect is produced in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button images BG are stocked. In addition, the stock number of the button images BG indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), a press promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the press promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "press" is displayed above the large button image BG. Also, a stock button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), a press-promotion effect (final period) is executed. In the press promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG “press” is displayed above the button image BG. Also, a stock button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top. The press promotion effect (end) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, a state in which the stocked button image BG has been used up is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (losing), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[This Omission Announcement Direction C]
FIG. 82 is a view for explaining the omission notification effect C.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started, a battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, two button images BG are obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA fights with the enemy character CRB. Here, an effect is produced in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA fights with the enemy character CRB. Here, an effect is produced in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a (stocked). Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of eight button images BG are stocked. In addition, the stock number of the button images BG indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background of the jackpot determination.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of this omission notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect in which the button images BG are stocked is performed (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F). )) Then, when the player presses the effect button 63, a press promoting effect of digesting the stored button image BG is performed (FIGS. 80 (E) (F), 81 (E) (F)). In the middle of the press promotion effect, a jackpot determination effect is performed (FIG. 80 (G)). According to this configuration, the hit of the jackpot is notified by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect in which the button image BG is stocked is performed a plurality of times. In addition, one or more button images BG are stocked by one button get effect (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F). ). According to this configuration, the stock of the button image BG that enables the operation of the effect button 63 is gradually increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect indicates the degree of expectation to a big hit. According to this configuration, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect is an important factor, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a jackpot determination effect for notifying the jackpot determination can be executed (FIGS. 80 (G) and 82 (G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot determination effect is executed, the user can be immersed in a sense of superiority, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after executing the button get effect, the jackpot determination effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIGS. 82 (B), (D), (F), (G). )). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the omission notification effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, an ally character CRA appears as a jackpot determination effect, and the background is set as a rainbow background RB. On the other hand, the effect of notifying the jackpot determination may be any effect. For example, a full-rotation effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R rotate in a so-called slotted state may be performed. Also, for example, a premiere effect of displaying a premium image in which a jackpot is determined may be used. For example, the effect may be such that the effect button 63 is vibrated, air is sent to the player, or a specific lamp is turned on.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the press promotion effect, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top (FIG. 81 (F)). Here, if the jackpot determination effect is not executed and the stocked button images BG are used up, the winning is lost (FIG. 81 (G)). On the other hand, an effect may be performed in the middle of the press-promotion effect that clearly indicates that the player has been lost.

[Modification 3]
Although the above is an example of reporting the hit of the jackpot lottery, it is also possible to notify of the hit in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot, and the furnace hit in the shift lottery to the high accuracy state after the jackpot game. Good.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
A first effect in which an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on a display screen; a second effect in which the operation unit image stocked in the first effect is consumed by operating the operation unit; A third effect capable of notifying a winning in a specific lottery during the second effect;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The first effect is an effect in which one or more operation unit images are stocked a plurality of times.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B2-1 or Aspect B2-2,
The expected number of wins in the specific lottery is suggested by the number of stocks of the operation unit image in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B2-1 to Aspect B2-3,
The specific lottery in the third effect is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The third effect is a definitive effect that informs the user of the jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B2-1 to Aspect B2-5,
The third effect can be executed after the first effect without executing the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The confirmed effect includes a full rotation effect that fluctuates in a state where the effect symbols are aligned,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The operation unit image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation unit image display effect can be executed during various effects such as during a change effect of a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main image. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation part image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), during the round game after the jackpot determination, an effect to determine whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge). Here, in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot, an effect aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion effect). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of “MAX acquisition challenge!” Is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in the current jackpot. The MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of “one shot!” Is displayed. This suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. In the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.
In addition, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 83 (C) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. In the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BG. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), at the center of the display screen 7a, the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 83 (E) gradually disappear. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. In the sword image KG, the portion where the button image BG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BG. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 83 (G) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the validity period of the operation reception of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed on the front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, a character image MG4 of “push in !!” is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the upper part of the sword image KG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player presses down the sword member 64 and MAX acquisition is determined, a character image MG5 of “MAX acquired!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation part image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), during the round game after the jackpot determination, an effect of determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge). Here, in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot, an effect aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion effect). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of “MAX acquisition challenge!” Is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in the current jackpot. The MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of “one shot!” Is displayed. This suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG except for the size. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 84 (C) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 84 (E) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 84 (G) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the validity period of the operation reception of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed on the front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, a character image MG4 of “push in !!” is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the upper part of the sword image KG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player presses down the sword member 64 and MAX acquisition is determined, a character image MG5 of “MAX acquired!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation section image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), during the round game after the jackpot determination, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge). Here, in a state where 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the jackpot, an effect aiming at promotion from the number of rounds 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R (round promotion effect). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of “MAX acquisition challenge!” Is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in the current jackpot. The MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of “one shot!” Is displayed. This suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. In addition, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. In addition, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), a button image BG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button images BG of FIGS. 85 (B) to 85 (H). The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the button image BG and is displayed on the front of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, a character image MG6 of “press!” Is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front of the button image BG so as to overlap the upper part of the button image BG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (J), when the player presses down the effect button 63 and cannot obtain MAX, a character image MG7 of “MAX acquisition failed!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. You.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect will be described below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, a first image in which a button image BG (first operation unit image) and a sword image KG (second operation unit image) are displayed so as to overlap with each other. And a second effect in which one of the button image BG and the sword image KG is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, a portion of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visually recognized through the button image BG. Displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, the third effect in which the sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the button image BG is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, in the third effect, a portion of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to visually recognize due to the sword image KG. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation unit image display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed during the round game, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a jackpot game, or the like.
[Modification 2]
In FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed in the effect (MAX acquisition challenge effect) for determining whether or not the maximum number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in an effect that determines whether or not a specific effect is successful, an effect that determines whether or not a jackpot is performed, an effect that determines whether a normal jackpot or a probable jackpot is performed, or the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. And may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification 4]
83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the button image BG is the same as the image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 or the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. Although the image is used, as the operation unit image, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, and other images representing the appearance of various operation units can be used.
[Modification 5]
83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image. In addition, a portion of the background image where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
A first operation unit and a second operation unit that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit,
A first effect in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed so as to overlap with each other;
A second effect in which one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front of the second operation unit image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is displayed so as to be visible through the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B3-2 or Aspect B3-3,
Before the first effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the second operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the third effect, a portion of the first operation unit image that is located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to visually recognize due to the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B3-4 or Aspect B3-5,
A size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first effect is different from a size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third effect;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The appearance and disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. 86 to 88, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the image display is performed. Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawings. is there.

  The appearance and disappearance effect of the effect button is executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to a stop of the change), during a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player (a big hit effect), and the like. The intention of the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for jackpot games, and an ending command for jackpot games). When the analysis and the instruction to execute the appearance disappearance effect of the effect button are included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Here, the effect disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described first, and the effect disappearance effect B of the effect button and the effect disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described in order.

[Production button appearance disappearance effect A]
First, the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram for describing the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance button disappearance effect A of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. In the effect A of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started to be changed, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "7"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed and reach is formed. ing.

  When the reach is formed, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. And is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The “predetermined light emission mode” is, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  Once the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be performed. The appearance and disappearance of the production button will be the beginning of the performance disappearance performance execution period, the timing will be started, and the production button will be displayed until the end of the performance button appearance and disappearance performance execution period The appearance disappearance effect of can be performed. In other words, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period defines an effective period during which the effect button appearance and disappearance effect can be performed, and the intention of the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is determined. It is a period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

  When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display of the image display device 7 is performed as shown in FIG. 86 (B). On the upper left of the screen 7a, the same image as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which all the characteristic information such as the button shape, the size, and the light emission mode are the same) or a similar image (part or all of the characteristic information) The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as a similar image (the light emission mode may be the same or different) in a mode in which the second effect button image BTN2 appears, and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. In order to prompt the user to perform an operation, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. .

  When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears as shown in FIG. 86 (C). (Disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

  When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, a second effect button image BTN2 appears on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86 (D). A first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to be displayed and to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. Then, the display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

  Thereafter, when the end of the effect button appearance disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes a numeral. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "9", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "7", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although the display is stopped and displayed as “7” and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, the numeral “ 7)), when the stop display is completed, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given to the player is performed.

  In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 86 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player completely operates (presses) the effect button 63. If no operation is performed, the effect button appearance and disappearance effects shown in FIGS. 86B to 86E performed during the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period are not performed, and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution is performed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 86 (F) are stopped and displayed.

  As described above, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first effect button image BTN. I have.

[Effect disappearance effect B of effect button]
Next, the appearance disappearance effect B of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the appearance disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance button disappearance effect B of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. In the appearance B of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 87A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started to be changed, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "7"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed to form a reach. ing.

  When the reach is formed, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. And is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The “predetermined light emission mode” is, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  Once the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be performed. The appearance and disappearance of the production button will be the beginning of the performance disappearance performance execution period, the timing will be started, and the production button will be displayed until the end of the performance button appearance and disappearance performance execution period The appearance disappearance effect of can be performed. In other words, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period defines an effective period during which the effect button appearance and disappearance effect can be performed, and the intention of the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is determined. It is a period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

  When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display of the image display device 7 is performed as shown in FIG. A hole image MH imitating a mole hole is displayed on the left side and the right side near the upper side of the screen 7a, and a hole image MH imitating a mole hole is formed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, A hole image MH imitating a hole of a mole is displayed on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the left side and the right side, respectively, and five holes imitating a hole of the mole are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image MH is displayed. Here, the five hole images MH have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

  From the hole image MH on the left side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an image simulating a mole having a smiley face (hereinafter, referred to as a “smiley image”) MCH1 is displayed in such a manner that the face appears. , The same image as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which the characteristic information such as the button shape, the size, and the light emission mode are all the same) or a similar image (one with the characteristic information) The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed as a part or all similar images (the light emission mode may be the same or different). At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the left side of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and from the smiling face image MCH1, an image simulating a mole having a face whose eyes turn and crackles (hereinafter referred to as a mole). , "Kurakura Mogra image".) Displayed in a manner changed to MCH2. Note that the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

  When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), color glasses (eg, black glasses) are obtained from the hole image MH on the right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Image (hereinafter, referred to as “glasses mole image”) MCH3 is displayed in such a manner that the face appears. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. In some cases, the second effect button image BTN2 may be arranged and displayed above the glasses mole image MCH3 together with the glasses mole image MCH3.

  When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, three times), as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the display is changed from the spectacles mole image MCH3 to the jiggle mole image MCH2. You. The spectacles mole image MCH3 is strongly struck unlike the smiling mole image MCH1, and when the spectacles mole image MCH3 appears, the striking button 63 must be operated a plurality of times (here, three times) (press operation) to be strongly hit. It does not change from the spectacle mole image MCH3 to the crawl mole image MCH2. Note that the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. Further, when the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the head of the spectacle mole image MCH3 together with the spectacle mole image MCH3, the player presses the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, 3 When only the operation is performed (press operation), the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a manner changed from the spectacles mole image MCH3 to the jiggle mole image MCH2. Is done.

  When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the smiling face MCH1 changes the face from the hole image MH on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the smiling face image MCH1. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a manner changed from the smiling image MCH1 to the image MCH2. Note that the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the smiling face MCH1 appears from the hole image MH at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), the display is changed from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the moving mole image MCH2. Note that the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  Thereafter, when the end of the effect button appearance disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period during which the effect button appearance disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 87 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L becomes a numeral. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "9", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "7", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although the display is stopped and displayed as “7” and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, the numeral “ 7)), when the stop display is completed, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given to the player is performed.

  In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87A is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player completely operates (presses) the effect button 63. If no operation is performed, the effect button appearance and disappearance effects shown in FIGS. 87 (B) to 87 (I) performed during the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period are not performed, and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution is performed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 87 (J) are stopped and displayed.

  As described above, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the smiling mole image MCH1 and the spectacle mole image MCH3 appear.

[Production button appearance disappearance effect C]
Next, the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram for describing the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button is performed during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the jackpot effect is performed). It will not be performed if there is a so-called "reserved ream" before the game is over if there is a big hit in the reserved ball). The presence / absence of the pending repetition is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, the jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command. In addition, when the production of the reserved streak is not performed, in other words, before the big hit production ends, there is no one that has a big hit in the reserved ball.

  In the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 specifies a specific one of the periods from the beginning to the end of the big hit effect (big hit game). During the period, an effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select an effect mode after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) is displayed. In the specific period, a first period for selecting an effect mode (the effect mode selection period) and a mode transition to the effect mode selected after the first period (the effect mode selection period) have elapsed. (A production mode confirmation notification period). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the big hit effect (big hit game)) The start of the predetermined period and the end of the specific period coincide with each other in order to perform a catch-copy effect in which the catch phrase of the gaming machine maker is displayed, and a dive prevention effect in which an alert for dependence on the game (intrusion) is displayed. ing.

  When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, a first effect button image BTN imitating effect button 63 is displayed as an image in order to prompt the gaming machine player to select an effect mode by operation (press operation) of effect button 63. It is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The “predetermined light emission mode” is, for example, blinking white.

  The effect mode composed of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated so that the specific area is rotated. Is displayed on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the effect mode that has reached is larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in the specific area as a default. However, when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, (A mode) may be always arranged in the specific area, or when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time, the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area.

  On the right side of the selection section SEL, a demonstration area DS for explaining the contents of the currently selected effect mode with various images and various characters is provided on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demonstration area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and a character “DEMO” indicating a demonstration screen in the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS, and is the same image as the first effect button image BTN. (An image in which the characteristic information such as the shape, size, and light emission mode of the button are all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or entirely similar to the characteristic information (the light emission mode may be the same or different) The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the demo area DS. Note that a description MME about the progress of the effect in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demonstration area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating the “cloud” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demo area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the B mode moves downward, the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  In the C mode, an effect on the theme of “rain” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME on the progress of the effect in the C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the C mode moves downward, the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the D mode moves downward, the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from below to above, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is specified from above. The display is performed in such a manner that the reels rotate toward the area, and the A mode is again in a display mode in which the reel is positioned in the specific area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Thereafter, in a state in which the A mode is in a display mode positioned in a specific area of the selection unit SEL, a first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting an effect mode elapses, and a transition to the selected effect mode is performed. At the beginning of the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition, the four corners of the demonstration region DS, which is a rectangular region, are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in a manner of expanding toward four corners (enlarged aspect), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a theme imitating the “sun” that progresses with the “sun” in the A mode as a theme The image PM is displayed large, and a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the A mode is directed to the center of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the right of the theme image PM. Is displayed larger, second performance button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game), the beginning of the predetermined period comes (that is, When a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) arrives, a catch copy effect in which a catch copy of the gaming machine maker is displayed, and a reminder for dependence on the game (dipping). Is displayed, and at the end of the predetermined period, that is, at the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the effect is performed with the theme of “sun” in the A mode. The theme image PM imitating the moving "sun" is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second effect button image A state of TN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Then, based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, the entry of the game ball into the second start port (the second start winning port, the second ball entry port, the variable start port) 21), the front of the theme image PM is The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in such a manner that the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the theme image PM, which is a background image arranged behind the decorative symbol, can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect C of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button, the reel is rotated in the effect mode composed of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. The effect mode in which the specific area is reached by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other effect modes. At this time, in the demonstration area DS, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 is moved from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demo area DS) of the image display device 7. Or disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the appearance button disappearance effect of the effect button is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the effect button 63 (operation means) which can be operated by the player, An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is provided on the image display device 7. Based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means) in the state displayed on the (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (the second effect button image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation device image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display device), and the first effect is displayed on the image display device 7 (display device). (Display means) (image display device 7 (table Disappears from the unit) (disappears)) can be performed with the second effect, at least one of. According to this configuration, based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) simulating the effect button 63 (operation means) ) Can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappear) from the image display device 7 (display means)). It can be entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the effect disappearance effect B of the effect buttons in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the effect disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Is the first effect button image BTN (first operation) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). (Device image). For example, while the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second effect button image BTN2 (second Are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display) changes the arrangement of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image). Means), the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
In the appearance button disappearance effect B of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is located at the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While displayed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation unit image) is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display unit) and the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display unit). This is the same because it is displayed.
In the appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is located at the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While displayed, a second effect button is provided in the demonstration area DS (lower right side of the demonstration area DS) arranged on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). This is the same because the image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image). Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when the reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (during the predetermined effect), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Can be displayed after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when the reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (during the predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). ), The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually displayed as an image. When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the display mode is such that the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be improved. The same applies to the appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).
In the appearance and disappearance effects C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) in a specific period in the period from the beginning to the end of the big hit effect (big hit game). When an effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select a later effect mode is displayed (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. After the image is displayed on 7 (display means), when the A mode is selected, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the user can actually select the A mode. Second production button When the image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the display mode is such that the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears. Can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) includes the left decorative symbol 8L, The reach effect can be displayed in the variable effect display of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The predetermined effect is a reach effect. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be a period during which the reach effect is being performed. After the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), in addition to the image of the reach effect, the appearance of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest. The same applies to the appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) displays the big hit effect (hit game). The first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the predetermined effect is a big hit effect (hit game effect). It is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a time period during which the big hit effect (hit game effect) is performed. The specific period can be set, and in addition to the image of the big hit effect (hit game effect), after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button is further displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operation means image) can appear, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image). And the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) The colors () can visually entertain the player, and can enhance the interest. The same applies to the effect disappearance effect B of the effect buttons in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the effect disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the appearance disappearance effect of the effect button will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the effect A of appearance button disappearance effect of FIG. 86, the appearance disappearance effect B of effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance disappearance effect C of effect button of FIG. The first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and based on the effect button 63 (operation means) being operated (pressed), A first effect in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means); The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). Can do either one It came. However, instead of the effect button 63 (operation means), a sword member 64 or a sword button 65 may be used. In this case, the image display device 7 (display means) includes the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) with the sword member 64. And an image imitating the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
In the effect A of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button in FIG. 86, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect button 63 is operated (depressed) again (depressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). . However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) has disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice, three times, ..., A predetermined fixed number of times out of 9, 10 times, or a random number set in real time by a lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) out of 2 to 10 times An operation (press operation) may be performed. In this way, every time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). (Appearance) can be eliminated. Also, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (or disappears) on the image display device 7 (display means) depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. , Can be found by the player himself, so that the act of pressing the operation button 63 (pressing operation) is made less likely to be monotonous, thereby suppressing a decrease in the willingness to play. It can also contribute to things.

[Modification 3]
In an effect disappearance effect A of the effect button in FIG. 86 and an effect disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Each time (disappearing) and displayed (appears), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is increased stepwise toward the maximum size. Is also good. In this case, every time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is always increased stepwise toward the maximum size. Alternatively, the size may be kept at a fixed size from the position before the maximum size (the size (several stages before the maximum size)). In this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player by the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 will occur. This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to become passive.

[Modification 4]
In the effect disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the effect disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Each time (disappearing) and displayed (appears), a big hit game (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player with the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is expected to occur. You may make it change in steps to the color which raises a feeling. For example, the color changes stepwise from white → blue → green → red → golden → seven colors (rainbow color). This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant to operate (press operation) the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such a moving image is a moving image that describes the flow of the effect of each mode, the characters, the background, the scene, and the like. The moving image may be a three-dimensional CG moving image, an animation moving image, or a movie. It may be one scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modification 6]
In the effect A of appearance button disappearance effect of FIG. 86, the appearance disappearance effect B of effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance disappearance effect C of effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) When the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation Means), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect button image BTN2 ( The second effect in which the (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. . However, in the state where the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed. Every time is operated (press operation), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect is performed, for example, the effect button 63 (operating means) is operated only ten times (when it is pressed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) May be performed so that the second effect is displayed (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)) on the image display device 7 (display means). 63 (operation means) Each time the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is displayed. A second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating (operation means) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears from the image display device 7 (display means) )) The second effect is executed, and, for example, the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only ten times (when it is pressed down), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) May be able to execute the first effect displayed (appearing) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 7]
In the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the big hit effect (effect of a hit game). After that, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as an effect of the winning game, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect. The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed during the effect in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect. After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 ( (Display means).

[Modification 8]
In the effect A of appearance button disappearance effect of FIG. 86, the appearance button disappearance effect B of FIG. 87, and the appearance button disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. Effect may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of displaying various images,
In a state where the first operation unit image imitating the operation unit is displayed on the display unit, based on the operation of the operation unit,
A first effect in which a second operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which the second operation means image is not displayed on the display means,
Capable of performing at least one of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The second operation means image is displayed at a position different from the first operation means image in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B4-1 or Aspect B4-2,
The first operation means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined effect,
The second operation means image can be displayed after the first operation means image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means can display a reach effect in the variable effect display of the decorative pattern,
The predetermined effect is the reach effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a winning game effect,
The predetermined effect is an effect of the winning game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B4-1 to Aspect B4-5,
The color of the first operation means image and the color of the second operation means image are the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning information presentation effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the winning notification effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

  In each of the winning information presentation effects A to C, the effect button 63 is enabled during the battle effect, and when the number of operations of the effect button 63 reaches any one of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times, the jackpot finalized effect. It is a production to execute. If the jackpot determination effect is not executed even when the number of times has reached 14, the loss is determined.

[Winning information production A]
FIG. 89 is a view for explaining the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle effect (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, the display screen 7a does not display a message urging the user to press the effect button 63. Operation is detected. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA hunts to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle effect (middle term), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left. In the battle effect (middle term), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background of the jackpot determination. In addition, a message image MG saying "Big hit" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle effect (middle term), the operation of the effect button 63 reaches twelve times, so that the jackpot determination effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), a battle effect (end) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winning or losing of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, and a message image MG of "WIN" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called zigzag eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning information presentation B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle effect (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. That is, the display screen 7a does not display a message urging the user to press the effect button 63. Operation is detected. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background of the jackpot determination. In addition, a message image MG saying "Big hit" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle effect (middle period), the operation of the effect button 63 has reached five times, and the jackpot determination effect has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA hunts to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle effect (middle term), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winning or losing of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, and a message image MG of "WIN" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called zigzag eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning information production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle effect (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character “press” is displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 detects an operation of the effect button 63 based on a signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA hunts to the right. In the battle effect (initial stage), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character “press” is displayed. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle effect (middle term), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left. In the battle effect (middle term), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character “press” is displayed. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), a battle effect (end) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winning or losing of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and a message image MG indicating “defeat” is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (losing), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R stop at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the effect button 63 during the battle effect, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination effect when a predetermined number of operations is reached. (FIGS. 89 (E) (F), 90 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of operation times of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 are set as the predetermined operation times. According to this configuration, since there is a plurality of timings at which the jackpot determination effect may be executed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot determination effect is not executed by 14 operations which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91 (E)), a failure in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, useless expectations can be avoided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period in which the effect button 63 is enabled, no effect for prompting operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E), FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a back command-like effect only for the player who knows the game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period in which the effect button 63 is enabled, there is a case where an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 91 (C) to (E)) and a case where it is not performed. (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E) and FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, the range of effects can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the winning notification effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
Although the operation of the effect button 63 has been described above as an example, the operation can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever, a sword accessory, or the like.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the example of notifying the winning of the jackpot lottery was reported, but it can also be applied to the winning of the maximum number of rounds in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of jackpot, and the winning in the lottery transition to the high-precision state after the jackpot. is there.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined operation times,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B5-1 or Aspect B5-2,
If there is no notification of the winning even when the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, a loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B5-1 to Aspect B5-3,
During the predetermined effect, does not perform a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B5-1 to Aspect B5-3,
During the predetermined effect, there may be a case where a promotion effect for prompting the operation of the operation unit is performed, and a case where the promotion effect is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The outer and inner effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described below with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 92 to 94, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and Decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  The outer and inner effects of the three-dimensional image are executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), during a jackpot game (a big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and the like. Can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, various jackpot game opening commands, a jackpot game round designation command, a jackpot game ending command), and a button. When the instruction to execute the effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Here, the outline inside and outside effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described first, and the outline inside and outside effect B of the stereoscopic image and the outline inside and outside effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Outside / inside / outside production A of 3D image]
First, the outline inside / outside effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram for describing the outline inside / outside effect A of the stereoscopic image. In the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes, as a predetermined image, the number “4” of the three-dimensional image as a colored opaque three-dimensional image When appearing as FRM, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swaying and swinging (including rotation; the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary and the inner region FRMa of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). , The outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is the background image.

  Thereafter, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”). With the (outline) as a boundary, an inner region FMa of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) and an outer region FRMb of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) are formed. Be partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) becomes the background image.

  When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed large. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) decreases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Are displayed in a small size and the proportion of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) outside the outer region FRMb is increased by reducing the ratio of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) to the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the market.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Similarly, when the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”), the outer region FRMb of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”) increases or decreases as the ratio of the inside region FRa of the three-dimensional image FRM to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The ratio occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  A pattern (not shown) is provided in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), a first geometric pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

  Thereafter, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the frame of the stereoscopic image from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) as the predetermined image, as shown in FIG. When the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is switched as the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increases, or one or both of them decreases. Displayed. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary and the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image. And an outer region FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a background image.

  Thereafter, when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shape (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. , An inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes a background image.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at a timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )) From the first geometrical pattern (a pattern in which squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (outline). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the display is switched to the one in which bricks are stacked as the second geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character body CRA appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

  Inside the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are increased. When the region FMa is displayed in a large size, the ratio occupied on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM decreases, and the image display device 7 displays the image. The ratio occupied by the screen 7a is reduced. In contrast, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the outer shape of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is reduced. When the inner region FMa of the (contour) is displayed small, the ratio occupied on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases, and the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes large. The proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases.

  Thereafter, when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become large. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an aspect, or is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a mode in which one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced. Then, similarly, the ratio of the inside area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased or decreased. The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as the predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is performed. The second geometric pattern (the pattern in which the bricks are piled up) is displayed on the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) as it is and is displayed as a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) as a predetermined image to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again. When the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both of them becomes large or one or both become small. You.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at a timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ), The third geometric pattern (brick-stacked pattern) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) is changed to the third geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The octagons are displayed as a pattern in which the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as the predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is performed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) is the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix). ) Is displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is switched, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both of them becomes large or one or both becomes small. .

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at a timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )) From the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the form of a matrix in which the octagons are vertically and horizontally spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the image is switched and displayed as a fourth geometric pattern in which the alphabetical letter V is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the moving image of the two character bodies CRA and CRB becomes closer to each other in the inner region FRMa. Will be played.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The action effect is displayed by the two character bodies CRA and CRB. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed on the image display device 7. It is displayed large on the screen 7a.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and image display is performed. If the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) is performed in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative pattern is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display is stopped, the loss is definitely displayed.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, for example, when the character RCA is replaced with the character RCB. When the player wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continued). On the other hand, when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB, the left-handed game is started ( Alternatively, the game is returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

  Note that, by increasing one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes larger, or the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes larger. When one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM are reduced, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is reduced. However, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is increased due to the increase in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed large (enlarged display), the area around the character in which the background around the character, other characters or items existing around the character, etc. can be visually recognized in addition to the character is expanded. In addition, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is reduced due to the smaller inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area in which the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character size is displayed large on the other hand, while the character size is displayed small when it is far away (moves away from the player side).

[Outside / Outside production B of 3D image]
Next, the outline inside / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram for describing the outer / inner / outer side effect B of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / inner / outer-side production B of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes, for example, the number “4” of the three-dimensional image as a predetermined image as a colored and opaque three-dimensional image. When appearing as FRM, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary and the inner region FRMa of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). , The outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is the background image.

  Thereafter, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”). With the (outline) as a boundary, an inner region FMa of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) and an outer region FRMb of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) are formed. Be partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) becomes the background image.

  When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed large. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) decreases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Are displayed in a small size and the proportion of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) outside the outer region FRMb is increased by reducing the ratio of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) to the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the market.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Similarly, when the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. When the ratio of the inside area FRa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outside area FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed. The ratio occupying the display screen 7a of the device 7 is reduced or increased.

  A pattern (not shown) is provided in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), a first geometric pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque plate. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or spinning in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary and the inner region FRMa of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image. And an outer region FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is the background image.

  After this, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , An inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes a background image.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )) From the first geometric pattern (a pattern in which the quadrangles are arranged in the matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions with a predetermined interval therebetween) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. The three-dimensional image FRM is switched and displayed as a second geometrical pattern of bricks in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (outline). The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRA appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced. The inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, and the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape has also been deformed.

  When the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed large, and the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed. By increasing the ratio occupied by 7a, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is reduced, and the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. On the other hand, when the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed in a small size, and the image is displayed. Since the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the device 7 is reduced, the outer region FRMb of the outline of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is increased, and the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased.

  After this, if the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, When the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, similarly, the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. By increasing or decreasing the ratio occupying the display area 7a, the ratio of the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. It gets expensive.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) again as the predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is performed. The second geometric pattern (the pattern in which the bricks are piled up) is displayed on the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) as it is and is displayed as a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (the numeral “4”) as a predetermined image to the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again. Then, when the plate-like three-dimensional image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )), The third geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) is changed to the third geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The octagons are displayed as a pattern in which the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, a character CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character body CRB is also deformed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM as the predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) again as the predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is performed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) is the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix). ) Is displayed on the outer region FRMb as it is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the switching is performed and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in a matrix) from the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the image is switched and displayed as a fourth geometrical pattern in which the alphabetical letter V is continuously arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, two characters CRA and CRB appear and approach the inside of the inner region FRMa, and the moving images of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed. Will be played. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shapes of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also deformed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The action effect is displayed by the two character bodies CRA and CRB. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the image display device 7 also displays the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB. It is displayed large on the screen 7a.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed in a reach effect (as a part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, an action effect is developed and image display is performed. If the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) is performed in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative pattern is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display is stopped, the loss is definitely displayed.

  Also, when a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character RCA is replaced with the character RCB. When the player wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas, for example, when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB, the left-handed game is started ( Or, the game is returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

  When the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increases, or the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes farther ( (Moving away from the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is reduced. However, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is increased due to the increase in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed large (enlarged display), the area around the character in which the background around the character, other characters or items existing around the character, etc. can be visually recognized in addition to the character is expanded. In addition, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is reduced due to the decrease in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area in which the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character size is displayed large on the other hand, while the character size is displayed small when it is far away (moves away from the player side).

[Outside / Outside production of stereoscopic images C]
Next, the outline inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram for describing the outer / inner / outer appearance C of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / inner / outer-side production C of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has, for example, the number “4” of the three-dimensional image as a predetermined image which is a colored and opaque three-dimensional image. When appearing as FRM, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary and the inner region FRMa of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). , The outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is the background image.

  Thereafter, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”). With the (outline) as a boundary, an inner region FMa of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) and an outer region FRMb of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) are formed. Be partitioned. Further, the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) becomes the background image.

  When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed large. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) decreases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Are displayed in a small size and the proportion of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) outside the outer region FRMb is increased by reducing the ratio of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) to the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In the market.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Similarly, when the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is similarly displayed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”), the outer region FRMb of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”) increases or decreases as the ratio of the inside region FRa of the three-dimensional image FRM to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The ratio occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  A pattern (not shown) is provided in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), a first geometric pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94B, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes the color opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) to the color opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image. ) Is switched to a three-dimensional image FRM viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a three-dimensional image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”)), and when the three-dimensional image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”) appears, the user approaches or moves far. It is displayed in such a manner as to stop, stop, or move up, down, left, and right. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, with the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a boundary. ), And the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is the background image.

  After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front. With the outer shape (contour) of “4”) as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the outer shape of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. (Outline) and an outer region FRMb. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is the background image.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. A first geometric pattern (a pattern in which squares are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other and displayed in an outer region FRMb of an outer shape (outline) of FRM (number “4”)) ) Is switched and displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, in which bricks are stacked as the second geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRB appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer side (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front and moves in the inner area FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. .

  When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. Since the FRMa is displayed large and occupied on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced, and the image display device 7 is reduced. In the display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (the number “4”) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. The outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is larger because the inner region FMa of the outer contour (contour) is displayed small and occupied on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. In other words, the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front again appears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front approaches the image. Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the stereoscopic image viewed from the front is also displayed. As the ratio of the inside area FRMa of the outer side (outline) of the FRM (the number “4”) occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the stereoscopic image FRM ( The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer side (outline) of the numeral “4”) occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. When the image is switched to (number “4”) and the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image FRM (numeric “ 4 ”) is displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number“ 4 ”) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour). It is taken over and displayed as it is, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is again displayed as a predetermined image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a predetermined image. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched to (number “4”) and viewed from the front, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving up, down, left and right.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. From the second geometric pattern (brick-stacked pattern) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of FRM (number “4”), the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. In the outer region FRMb (outline), octagons are displayed as a third geometric pattern which is arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions with a predetermined space therebetween. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

  Further, here, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front approaches and partly protrudes from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (pops out), the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. Are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as two discontinuous inner regions FRMa, FRMa as discontinuous regions, and straddle the two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa. In this mode, the character body CRA with the sword newly appears and moves in the two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. When the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") is switched to (numerical "4"), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “ 4 "), the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. It is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the image FRM (number “4”), and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a predetermined image. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is viewed from the front and is switched to the number "4"), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving up, down, left and right.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. The third geometric pattern (octagons) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of FRM (number “4”) is arranged in a matrix by being spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical and horizontal directions. Pattern) to a pattern in which an English letter V is continuously arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions as a fourth geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRB appears again in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. You.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. When the image is switched to (number “4”) and the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “ 4 ”), the fourth geometrical pattern (a pattern in which the English letter V is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number“ 4 ”). It is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour), and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) as the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a predetermined image. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed by switching to the number “4”), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving up, down, left and right, and stopping.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a predetermined image. A stereoscopic image viewed from the front from the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which the alphabetic V-shape is continuously arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of FRM (number “4”), the tile is displayed as a fifth geometrical pattern by switching to tiles arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions. The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRA appears again in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front, and the character CRA moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. You.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are displayed on the image display device 7. Is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed. The image is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and image display is performed. If the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) is performed in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative pattern is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the display is stopped, the loss is definitely displayed.

  Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character RCA is replaced with the character RCB. When the player wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continued). On the other hand, when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB, the left-handed game is started ( Alternatively, the game is returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

  It should be noted that when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front increases. The inside region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front due to the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) being viewed from the front or moving away from the player side (moving away from the player side). Becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced. However, the outer region (contour) of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front increases, and accordingly, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. The size of the character displayed in the inside area FRMa of the character is not displayed large (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visually recognized. The area around the character that can do it is expanded. In addition, since the inner region FRMa of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced accordingly. The size of the character displayed in the inside area FRMa is not displayed small (reduced display), but the area surrounding the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be visually recognized also becomes smaller. Of course, the inside region FRMa of the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed by the character displayed in the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") seen from the front. The size of the character is displayed large when approaching (moving toward the player side), whereas the size of the character is displayed small when moving away (moving away from the player side). .

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the outer and inner effects of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer-side effect A of a three-dimensional image, an image display capable of displaying various images is provided. When the image display device 7 (display means) displays the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) on the image display device 7 (display means), the device 7 (display means) is formed inside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). The character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to be displayed, and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of an outer frame (contour) of a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Can be performed, and framed Body image FRM (predetermined image) is adapted to be displayed on the movable image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). And a character body CRB (first effect image) and an outer region FRMb (second region) of an outer shape (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). ) Can be performed with the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the above), so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. it can.
In the outer / inner / outer-side effect B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). The character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer shape (outline) of the frame and the outside of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). And a background image (second effect image) having various geometrical patterns displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of an outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the stereoscopic image is formed inside the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front. A character CRA or a character CRB (first effect image) displayed in a region FRMa (first region) inside a contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and a stereoscopic image viewed from the front A background image (second image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of a contour (outline) of a three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is formed outside the image FRM. Effect image), which is the same as above.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer-side effect A of the three-dimensional image, as shown in FIG. The character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline), and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. ) Is different from a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area (). According to this configuration, the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Since the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed. The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer contour (contour) of, and the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
93B, 93D, and 93F, the inside / outside effect B of the three-dimensional image is a character in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. While the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, various geometric patterns are provided in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Since the background image (the second effect image) is displayed, the first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer edge (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary, and are the same.
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front is shown in the outline C inside and outside effect C of the stereoscopic image. While the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area), the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. ), A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region), so that the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other and are the same.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer-side effect A of the three-dimensional image, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (the predetermined The image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a small size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the character is set with the outline of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in which the body CRA and the character body CRB (first rendered image) are displayed, a background image having various geometric patterns is obtained. Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in which the (second effect image) is displayed is reduced, the player can be visually enjoyed. It can improve the interest.
In the outer / inner / outer-side effect B of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in which the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. When the inner region FRa (first region) becomes larger, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM on which a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The same applies to the case of
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7 ( The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the boundary of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front by moving and displaying on the display means). When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is increased, a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The same applies because the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer-side effect A of the three-dimensional image, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (the predetermined Image) is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, the outer region (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, is used as a boundary, so that the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM is formed. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is easily recognized as a partitioned region, and the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the (first area) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed. Can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometrical patterns, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. it can.
In the outer / inner / outer-side production B of the three-dimensional image in FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the three-dimensional image is used as a boundary. A region in which an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are partitioned. The character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. By setting the outer contour (contour) as a boundary, the inside area FMa (first area) of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are viewed. )), The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) is easily recognized as a partitioned area, and the inner region of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. A character body CRA or a character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in FRMa (first area) and an outer area FRMb (first area) of a contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Background image with various geometric patterns displayed in the area 2) Since the (second effect image), it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the same.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer-side effect A of the three-dimensional image, as shown in FIG. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outline is an inner region of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM that is bounded by the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM that is the three-dimensional image. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM bounded by the frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a three-dimensional image. Is an outer region of the outer contour (outline) of. According to this configuration, since the outer edge (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer edge (outline) of the edge-shaped three-dimensional image FRM can be used. ) And the outer region FRMb (second region) outside the frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are more easily visually recognized as partitioned regions. Thereby, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM Can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (outline) of the game. It is possible to visually entertain and improve the interest.
In the outer / inner / outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, can be used as a boundary. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are partitioned. It becomes easier to visually recognize the area. Thereby, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM And the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the above can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image. It is.
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. Since the outer contour (contour) can be used as a boundary, the inner area FRa (first area) of the outer contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the three-dimensional image FRM (number) viewed from the front The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (“outline”) of “4”) is more easily visually recognized as a partitioned region. Thereby, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, Recognition of a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of a contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. This is the same because it can contribute to the improvement of the performance.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the inside and outside effects of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Modification 1]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image in the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, it is a title (or a characteristic word included in the title) of any music among a plurality of musics used as a predetermined image to indicate the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the music title may be a structure (a planar or three-dimensional structure) to which the title of the music can be associated (imaged).

[Modification 2]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image in the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, the predetermined image may be an image described on the front surface of the second movable role 15 (for example, “OARO”).

[Modification 3]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image in the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C may be used as the predetermined images. In this case, an outer region (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digest image 9C is used as a boundary, and an inner region (first region) of the contour (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digest image 9C and a reserved image. 9A and 9B and an area outside the outline (outline) of the reserved digestion image 9C (second area). A still image and a moving image (a moving image by three-dimensional CG, a moving image by animation, and one scene of a movie) are displayed in a region (first region) inside the outer periphery (outline) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. A background image (still image, moving image (moving image by 3D CG, moving image by animation, moving image by movie, etc.) is provided in the outer region (second region) of the outline (outline) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. )) Is displayed.

[Modification 4]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image in the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the outer region (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (the outline) is set with the outer outline (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as a boundary. 1 region) and an outer region (a second region) outside the outline (outline) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. A still image, a moving image (a moving image by three-dimensional CG, a moving image by animation, a moving image of a movie, etc.) ) Are displayed, and a background image (still image, moving image (moving image by three-dimensional CG, moving image, Animations and movie scenes)) are displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 92, the inside area FRMa (first area) of the outer side (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, as the predetermined image, and the in-outside-outside effect of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In B, the inside area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, is used as the predetermined image. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is a background image having various geometric patterns that are still images. However, the background image may be a moving image instead of a still image, or a mixture of a still image and a moving image. The moving image may be, for example, a moving image based on three-dimensional CG, a moving image based on an animation, or a scene of a movie, in addition to a moving object having various geometric patterns.

[Modification 6]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is one stereoscopic image, is used as a predetermined image in the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94 is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a single stereoscopic image, as a predetermined image in the three-dimensional image FRM in the shape of FIG. 94. Was one stereoscopic image. However, a plurality of stereoscopic images may be used as the predetermined image. In this case, the same image (background image) or a different image may be used in the outer region (second region) outside the contour (contour) of each stereoscopic image. May be displayed so that the whole image of one image can be grasped through an inner region (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image. Area), the same image may be displayed or different images may be displayed. In this way, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the outer / inner / outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image, has one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length increased, or one or both decreased. Was displayed in such a manner that However, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with such a configuration, a character to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). Body CRA or character body CRB (first effect image) and outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (outline) of frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) ), A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the area can be executed, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. be able to.

[Modification 8]
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7 ( Although the moving image is displayed on the display means), the moving image is not limited to the image viewed from the front, and the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) may have a display mode of rotating in a three-dimensional space or a display mode of rotating and moving. Good. In this case, when the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a manner approaching, and a part of the stereoscopic image FRM protrudes (projects) from the image display device 7 (display means), a discontinuous stereoscopic image is generated. .. Are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a plurality of stereoscopic images that have become images FRM (predetermined images), and the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic images FRM (predetermined images),. A plurality of independent inside regions are formed in the image display device 7 (display unit) as regions where FRMa is discontinuous. The character body CRA or the character body CRB appears and moves in the plurality of independent inner areas FRMa,... In this mode, a moving image of the character body CRA or the character body CRB is reproduced.

[Modification 9]
The outer / inner / outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 92, the outer / inner / outer effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 93, and the outer / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. Effect may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a predetermined image on the display means, a first effect image displayed in a first area formed inside the predetermined image, and a second effect image formed outside the predetermined image. And a second effect image to be displayed in the area can be executed,
The predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C1-1,
The first effect image and the second effect image are different,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C1-1 or Aspect C1-2,
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is displayed large on the display means, the second area is displayed small on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
The predetermined image is a stereoscopic image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
The first region is a region inside the contour of the stereoscopic image with the contour of the stereoscopic image as a boundary,
The second region is a region outside the outline of the stereoscopic image with the outline of the stereoscopic image as a boundary,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the selection display inhibition effects A to C in the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIG. 95 to FIG. 97, the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the image display is performed. Some decorative symbols and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  The selection display prevention effect in the effect mode can be executed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, a specific period during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and the like. The intention of the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 by the player can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for jackpot games, and an ending command for jackpot games). When the instruction to execute the button effect is included in the analysis, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Here, first, the selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode will be described, then the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode, and the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode will be described in order.

[Production mode selection display prevention effect A]
First, the effect A for preventing the selection and display of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the effect A for preventing the selection and display of the effect mode. The selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. In the selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started to be changed, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image (here, the image of “cloud”) arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed.

  Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is given for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  A reserved digestion image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the special figure reservation is displayed and arranged in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the left side of the reserved digestion image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figure reservations are displayed on the image display device 7 linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged and displayed below the screen 7a. The reserved image 9A and the reserved digest image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digest image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. Note that the size of the reserved image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

  On the right side of the reserved digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in the specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode to be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, imitating “clouds”) is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. You.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, thereby causing the A mode. Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the B mode disposed above A mode is such that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and a theme image PM simulating “rain” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is moved downward, so that the C mode is activated. Is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C modes is such that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect under the theme of “snow” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from below to above, and the mode A arranged above the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. The display mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  When the decorative symbol in FIG. 95A starts to change, there are cases where reach is not formed and cases where reach is formed. When the reach is formed, a reach effect based on the jackpot expectation degree is performed. There are multiple reach productions. When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol (number) as shown in FIG. 95 (B). (In this case, temporary stop at the numeral “1”), the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. The display is arranged and arranged below the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode goes upward from below. The reel is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from above to the specific area. In the C mode, the theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95 (C). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L (temporary stop at the numeral "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is medium. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure reservation has already reached the upper limit of the four first special figure reservations, the first special figure reservation does not increase, and the five reserved images 9A are displayed. The image is not linearly arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode goes upward from below. The reel is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from above to a specific area. In the D mode, the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. Also, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, temporarily stopped at the numeral "5"). The left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "3", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed.

  When the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as the number “1”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed as the number “5”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as the number “3”, the display is stopped until the next decorative symbol starts to change. In the period (hereinafter, referred to as “interval”), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is performed. The mode cannot be selected. Thus, in the interval, the effect mode already selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decoration pattern starts to change, the already selected effect mode is continued and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is finished, the already selected effect mode is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Then, by the start of the change of the next decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), it is linearly arranged below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A arranged is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are moved rightward one by one. Displayed shifted. A message MG "mode change with effect button" that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 along with the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

  In the series of effects from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) to the stage in FIG. 95 (D), no reach was formed. On the other hand, when the reach was formed, Following FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates. When the reach is displayed and formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), at this point, the selection unit SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. When the operation (press operation) is performed, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL can be moved downward, and the effect mode can be selected. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbols, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. The image is displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  When the reach is formed and the reach effect proceeds, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), car images GYK imitating a car form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image. As described above, when the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called “group notice” is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL is activated from the lower right side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Even if it disappears (disappears) and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the effect mode cannot be selected. Has become. Even if the group notice is given, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, the reach effect proceeds, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "0", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1", and the stop is displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed. . Even in this state, the selection unit SEL is in a state of disappearing (disappearing) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates the staging button 63 (press operation), The selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the effect mode cannot be selected.

  During the period from when the group announcement is made, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. Also, it is not possible to select the effect mode, and further, from the stop display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R to the start of the change of the next decorative symbol. Even during the period (hereinafter, referred to as “interval”), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. Thus, in the two periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the group notice is performed, the already-selected effect mode is continued and the theme image PM imitating the “cloud” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 unless the next decoration pattern starts to change. 7a is displayed in large size. Even if a demonstration screen for waiting for a customer (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for a customer (standby screen) ends, the effect mode already selected is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  After that, when the next decoration pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. When the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are moved rightward one by one. Displayed shifted. A message MG "mode change with effect button" that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 along with the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

[Production mode selection display prevention effect B]
Next, the selection display prevention effect B in the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a view for explaining the effect B for preventing the selection and display of the effect mode. The selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. In the effect display selection display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started to be changed, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image (here, the image of “cloud”) arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed.

  Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is given for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  A reserved digestion image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the special figure reservation is displayed and arranged in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the left side of the reserved digestion image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figure reservations are displayed on the image display device 7 linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged and displayed below the screen 7a. The reserved image 9A and the reserved digest image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digest image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. Note that the size of the reserved image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

  On the right side of the reserved digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other effect modes. The effect mode located in the specific area becomes the effect mode in which the effect mode is selected, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode to be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, imitating “clouds”) is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. You.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, thereby causing the A mode. Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the B mode disposed above A mode is such that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and a theme image PM simulating “rain” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is moved downward, so that the C mode is activated. Is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C modes is such that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect under the theme of “snow” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from below to above, and the mode A arranged above the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. The display mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  When the decorative symbol in FIG. 96 (A) starts to change, an effect indicating that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a jackpot (a so-called “look-ahead effect”) is not performed. There is a case where a pre-reading effect is performed on the reserved image 9A. When the pre-reading effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number), as shown in FIG. 96 (B). (In this case, temporary stop at the numeral “1”), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. The display is arranged and arranged below the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode goes upward from below. The reel is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from above to the specific area. In the C mode, the theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96 (C). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L (temporary stop at the numeral "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is medium. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the first special figure reservation has already reached the upper limit of the four first special figure reservations, the first special figure reservation does not increase, and the five reserved images 9A are displayed. The image is not linearly arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode goes upward from below. The reel is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from above to a specific area. In the D mode, the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96 (D). Also, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, temporarily stopped at the numeral "5"). The left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "3", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed.

  When the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as the number “1”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed as the number “5”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as the number “3”, the display is stopped until the next decorative symbol starts to change. In the period (hereinafter, referred to as “interval”), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is performed. The mode cannot be selected. Thus, in the interval, the effect mode already selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decoration pattern starts to change, the already selected effect mode is continued and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes. Even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is finished, the already selected effect mode is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Then, by the start of the change of the next decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), it is linearly arranged below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are moved rightward one by one. Displayed shifted. A message MG "mode change with effect button" that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 along with the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

  In a series of effects from the start of the change of the decoration pattern in FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (D), an effect indicating the possibility that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A includes a big hit (so-called, The “pre-reading effect” is not performed, but in the case where the pre-reading effect is performed on the reserved image 9A, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), following FIG. 96 (A). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) (here, temporarily stopped at the numeral "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. It has become. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. The display is arranged and arranged below the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Assuming that the reserved image 9A arranged closest to the reserved digestion image 9C is the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the first reserved image 9A, and the second reserved image 9A is placed. A third reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the reserved image 9A, and a reserved image 9A in which a game ball enters the first starting port 20 this time and added to the left of the third reserved image 9A. Are arranged as the fourth reserved image 9A.

  When an effect (pre-reading effect) indicating that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the fourth hold image 9A is performed, the display mode of the fourth hold image 9A is changed as a special image. Are displayed in a manner different from the display mode of the reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect that is a special image, based on the degree of expectation to be a big hit, the display mode of the reserved image 9A is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit thick)). The jackpot expectation is set higher. Here, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is to emit red light, and the other reserved images 9A (the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third reserved image 9A) ) Is a display mode in which white light is emitted (in the case where the pre-reading effect is not performed, and the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is the lowest).

  In addition, in the look-ahead effect that is a special image, as a display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) ), The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set to be high. However, a character body may be used instead of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape. In this case, in the aspect in which the display mode of the reserved image 9A is a character body, the expected degree of the big hit is at least equal to or larger than the expected degree of the big hit set in the mode of emitting red light as the display mode of the reserved image 9A. Is set to

  When the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed, the display of the special image is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. Is operated (pressed), the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the pre-reading effect is performed, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the numeral “3” is used). (Temporary stop), the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the process of changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed by the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, FIG. 96 (I)). After that, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped as the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped as the number "3". Is displayed.

  Then, by the start of the change of the next decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 96 (J), it is linearly arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are moved rightward one by one. It is displayed shifted. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, since the pre-reading effect has already been performed, the selection unit SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 even in this state. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

  As described above, when the prefetching effect is performed during the change in the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, if the prefetching effect is not performed, the effect mode is selected during the change. On the other hand, if the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Further, when the pre-reading effect is performed, the reserved image 9A in which the pre-reading effect has been performed moves to the right side as the reserved digestion image 9C, and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol. During the period from when the 8R is stopped and the loss is confirmed and displayed, even if it is a specific period from the start to the stop of the change of the decorative pattern in which the effect mode can be selected, the effect button 63 is displayed. The operation mode cannot be selected even if is operated (press operation). Furthermore, a period (hereinafter, referred to as “interval”) from the stop display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the suspended image 9A in which the pre-reading effect has been performed until the next decorative symbol starts to change. "). Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. Thus, in such a series of periods, the already-selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect has been performed is digested as the reserved digestion image 9C. The selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  In addition, when the reserved image 9A on which the pre-reading effect has been performed is digested as the reserved digestion image 9C and the jackpot has been won, after the jackpot effect is completed, the effect button 63 is operated as shown in FIG. A message MG indicating “mode change with effect button” notifying that the effect mode can be changed by pressing operation is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Is displayed, and the effect mode can be selected.

  In addition, even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is finished, the effect mode already selected is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

[Production mode selection display prevention effect C]
Next, the selection display prevention effect C in the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the effect C for preventing the selection and display of the effect mode. The selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode is an effect that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to a player, and is an effect that is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, it is not performed if there is a so-called “reserved ream” before the end of the jackpot effect, where there is a jackpot in the reserved ball). The presence / absence of the pending repetition is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, the jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command.

  Here, a case will be described in which a player performs a right-handed game to make a big hit, a big hit game (big hit effect) occurs, and the right-hit game is continued after the big hit game (big hit effect) ends. In addition, when the production of the reserved streak is not performed, in other words, before the big hit production ends, there is no one that has a big hit in the reserved ball.

  During the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), a game effect period from the beginning of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) to the end of performing all round game effects, and the game effect period Subsequently, a notification period for notifying a gaming state (for example, a state of returning to left-handing and a state of continuing right-handing) after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game), and a big hit effect (big hit game) following the notification period A special period in which a production mode selection screen that allows the player to select a production mode after the end of the game is displayed, and a catch phrase production or game in which a catch phrase of a gaming machine maker is displayed following the specific period There is a predetermined period during which a immersion prevention effect is displayed in which an alert to dependence on (intrusion) is displayed.

  In the specific period, a first period for selecting an effect mode (the effect mode selection period) and a mode transition to the effect mode selected after the first period (the effect mode selection period) have elapsed. (A production mode confirmation notification period).

  The end of a predetermined period in which a catch copy effect in which a game machine maker's catch phrase is displayed and an alert for dependence on a game (intrusion) are displayed, and the beginning and end of a jackpot effect (big hit game) And the end of the period up to.

  In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the effect of each round game in the big hit effect (big hit game) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and all the processes are ended. By doing so, the end of the game effect period, and at the beginning of the notification period, a message MG indicating “continue right-handed” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to continue right-handed. . In addition, the holding image 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In place of the reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is performed. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a numeral HMG, which is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed. Here, for example, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the number “0” is left, and the second special figure based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The four special figure reservations are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the numeral "4" is separated from each other on the right side.

  A message MG “continue right-handed” in FIG. 97A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in large size, and thereafter, the end of the notification period (for example, 3 seconds). At the beginning, there are a case where an effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select an effect mode after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) is displayed, and a case where the effect mode selection screen is not displayed. .

  When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the effect button 63 is pressed to prompt the gaming machine operator to select an effect mode by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation). The imitated first effect button image BTN is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The “predetermined light emission mode” is, for example, blinking white. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  The effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated so that the specific area is rotated. Is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the effect mode that has reached is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in the specific area as a default. However, when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, (A mode) may be always arranged in the specific area, or when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time, the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area.

  On the right side of the selection unit SEL, a demonstration area DS for explaining the contents of the currently selected effect mode with various images and various characters is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is done. The demonstration area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and a character “DEMO” indicating a demonstration screen in the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS, and is the same image as the first effect button image BTN. The second effect button image BTN2 is an image (an image in which the characteristic information such as the button shape, size, and light emission mode is all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or entirely similar to the characteristic information) in the demonstration area DS. It is arranged and displayed on the lower right side. Note that a description MME about the progress of the effect in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demonstration area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating the “cloud” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demo area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  In the C mode, an effect on the theme of “rain” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME on the progress of the effect in the C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL is moved downward, so that the C mode is activated. Is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C modes is such that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  In a state where the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation) and the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, a first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode elapses, At the beginning of the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition to the selected production mode, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), four corners of the demonstration region DS which is a rectangular region are displayed as images. The image is displayed in a manner of expanding toward four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (enlarged mode). On the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an effect is performed with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. The theme image PM imitating "cloud" is displayed large, and a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the B mode is displayed on the right side of the theme image PM from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the right side. During ~ To headed is displayed in a larger size. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented as numerals HMG in the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  After that, the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and a catch copy effect in which a catch copy of the gaming machine maker is displayed, and a dive prevention effect in which an alert for dependence on the game (entrancing) is displayed. At the beginning of the period, when this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) ends, the theme image imitating the “cloud” that proceeds with the “cloud” theme of the B mode An effect in which the PM is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 proceeds.

  At the end of the notification period in which the message MG “Right-handed continuation” in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed, and at the beginning of the specific period, a series from FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D) In the effect of (1), an effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) is advanced in the selected effect mode. On the other hand, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, is zero and the number is "0". Since the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is four and the number is "4", the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 are performed. When the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the special figure hold, the special image display is prioritized and the effect mode selection screen is not displayed to perform the effect of the hold sequence as the special image. For this reason, when the selection screen of the effect mode is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), light is applied from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions following FIG. 97 (A). The emitted flash image FH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented as numerals HMG in the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  After that, a reservation ream image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape indicating the existence of the reservation ream is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 97 (H). A first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the reserved run image HRC having a V-shape, whereas a reserved run having a V-shaped shape is arranged. Above the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the image HRC, a second character body HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged. The reserved continuous image HRC rotates around a vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the reserved continuous image HRC as a rotation axis, and repeatedly rotates, and the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC and the second surface of the reserved continuous image HRC repeatedly appear. It becomes a display mode.

  When an effect (pre-reading effect) indicating the possibility that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A (for example, FIG. 1 and FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J)) is performed, for example, a special The display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is different from the display mode of the other reserved images 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A) as images. The first hold image 9A, the second hold image 9A, and the third hold image 9A have a circular shape while the fourth hold image is displayed. The display mode of the image 9A may be a first character body HRC1 or a second character body HRC2 instead of having a circular shape. That is, the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the pre-reading effect is performed. Has become.

  In addition, the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC. Further, the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC, but the orientation and posture of the character are different. May be different.

  When the first side of the held continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (on the player side), it cannot be transmitted to the hit type, but the second start is performed. While it is possible to convey that the jackpot is included in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of a game ball into the mouth 21, the holding having the second character body HRC2 is possible. When the second surface of the series of images HRC is stopped and displayed facing forward (on the player side), it corresponds to four second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. It can be notified that the hold information includes a predetermined number or more (for example, two) of jackpots of 16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the first surface of the hold continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player), and The fact that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entering of the game ball is transmitted. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented as numerals HMG in the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, a catch-copy effect in which a game machine manufacturer's catch phrase is displayed, and a warning for dependence on the game (dipping) are displayed, and a period for performing an anti-dipping effect is started, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. By doing so, the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game). At the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the theme image PM that imitates the effect mode before the jackpot effect (jackpot game) occurs, for example, the “sun” that progresses the effect with the theme “sun” in A mode is an image. The effect that is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 will be performed.

  In addition, when the production of the hold series is performed, and then the big hit effect (big hit game) ends and the right-handed game is started, when the selection mode of the effect mode is displayed in the previous big hit effect (big hit game). In the case where the selection mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (B) and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) occurs again as shown in FIG. Although it is arranged in the specific area, the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific period, the selection mode display effect C for the effect mode is performed, but the effect of the suspended series is also performed in the same period as the specific period. In other words, in the first period (the effect mode selection period), in the effect mode selection display inhibition effect C, an effect in which the player can select the effect mode is performed, whereas in the effect of the hold continuous effect, the flash image is displayed. An effect is performed by the FH and the continuous repetition image HRC. Then, in the second period (the effect mode confirmation notification period), the effect of selecting the effect mode is performed in the effect display blocking effect C in the effect mode, while the effect of the selected consecutive mode is performed in the effect of the hold rendition. Performing a production that conveys The specific period during which the selection display inhibiting effect C of the effect mode is performed and the specific period during which the effect of the suspended series is performed are the same period. As a result, the time required for a series of effects from FIG. 97 (A) to FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D) and the time required for FIG. 97 (A) following FIG. 97 (G) to FIG. ) Is the same as the time required for a series of effects, so that a catch-copy effect in which a game machine maker's catch phrase is displayed and a warning to prevent dependence on the game (intrusion) are displayed. The beginning of the period is also the same, and no difference occurs at the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) after the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the selection display inhibition effect in the effect mode will be described.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIG. A first effect of displaying a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of effect modes among the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means); At least one of a second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed, and when reach is formed and the reach effect proceeds, The next stage (predetermined) in which an effect (group notice) in which car images GYK (special images) imitating a car run together so as to form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. Is satisfied) The display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 in the first effect is prevented, and the display of the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 in the second effect is prevented. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is provided on the image display device 7 (display means). Even if it is displayed, an effect (group notice) in which the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car travels together so as to form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next term (establishment of predetermined conditions), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented. As a result, the selection section SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
96 (H) to 96 (J) In the display inhibition effect B, selection in which one of the effect modes A, B, C and D (a plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even when the section SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed (predetermined conditions are satisfied). The display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (erased) from the image display device 7 (display unit). Therefore, the same is true.
In the display inhibition effect C shown in FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), one of the A, B, C and D modes (a plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even when the section SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the arrival of the next period (predetermined condition is satisfied) in which the production of the reserved ream is performed as a special image, When the effect is performed, the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display unit) ( This is the same as the above.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect display selection display prevention effect A, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of modes). The first effect in which the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes in the effect mode) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The second effect, which can be executed during the period, and displays the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means), is a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. Can be performed. According to this configuration, in the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, the selection unit that can select one of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes). A first effect in which SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and a second effect in which a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Can be executed, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
96 (A) to FIG. 96 (J), in the selection display prevention effect B, during the specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (multiple). The first effect in which the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes among the effect modes is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the prefetch effect, which is a special image, is displayed on the image display device 7. The second effect displayed on the (display means) is the same as the second effect.
97 (A) to FIG. 97 (I), in the selection display prevention effect C, during the specific period during the jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode And a first effect in which a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode among the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a holding image which is a special image. And the second effect of displaying the effect on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the selection display prevention effect A in the effect mode, the effect button 63, the sword member 64, which can be operated by the player, A sword button 65 and a select button 68 (a plurality of operation means) are provided, and the effect button 63 (specific operation means) of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (a plurality of operation means) is operated. One of the effect modes can be selected from among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) only when it is performed. According to this configuration, of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (a plurality of operation means), the ball is provided on the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and around the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61. Of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 arranged at the first position, the effect button 63 is arranged at the position closest to the player side and is formed larger than the select button 68, so that the change of the decorative symbol starts. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) in a limited period of a specific period from the stop to the fluctuation stop. The same applies to the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J) and the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the selection display inhibition effect A in the effect mode, when the reach is formed and the reach effect proceeds, the car is modeled. Of the next period in which an effect (group notice) is developed in which the car images GYK (special images) run together in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (group notice). When the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) based on the (establishment), the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display). Before executing the second effect displayed in (Means), the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes from the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). That previously selected effect mode (here, B-mode) in the first effect is adapted to be maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and ended, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode are completed. The effect mode (here, the B mode) that is already selected before the second effect is executed among the modes (a plurality of effect modes) is maintained, so that the player is visually enjoyed. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect modes of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), when the second effect of displaying the prefetch effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and the process ends. , A-mode, B-mode, C-mode, and D-mode (a plurality of effect modes), because the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed is maintained. .
In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), a second effect of displaying the effect of the hold sequence which is a special image on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. When the process ends, the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is maintained. It is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (E) of the selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of The first effect in which the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes among the effect modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect is an A mode, a B mode, a C mode, and a D mode ( The names of a plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel and are rotated and displayed, so that one effect mode to be selected is displayed in the most front side. According to this configuration, the names of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape. It is easy to comprehend the effect mode and the effect mode to be arranged subsequently.In addition, since one effect mode to be selected is a display mode arranged on the most front side, it is easy to select the effect mode and visually It can be entertained and enhance the interest. The same applies to the selection display inhibition effect B in the effect mode in FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E) and the selection display inhibition effect C in the effect mode in FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (G) to FIG. 97 (I) of the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode, the effect of the hold sequence which is a special image is performed (predetermined image). The condition) includes a condition indicating a degree of expectation of occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to a player. According to this configuration, before the jackpot effect is completed by performing the hold streak, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a game state that gives a profit to the player that there is a jackpot on the hold ball. it can.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the selection display prevention effect in the effect mode will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95 (H), the car images GYK (special images) imitating a car form a group together from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next term (the satisfaction of a predetermined condition) in which the running effect (group notice) is developed, the image display device 7 (of the selection unit SEL (selected image)) The selection unit SEL (selected image) has been erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display unit) by preventing the display on the display unit). However, even if the next period in which the effect (group notice) is developed (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the effect (group notice) is not developed and the image display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) is performed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to develop an effect (group notice), and if it is won, the effect (group notice) is developed. Do not expand the group notice). Note that the lottery for determining whether or not to develop the effect (group notice) may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.
96 (G) to FIG. 96 (J), in the selection display inhibition effect B, the prefetch effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the prefetch effect, which is a special image, is performed (establishment of a predetermined condition). Then, the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display unit). I was However, even if the next period in which the prefetch effect is performed (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the prefetch effect is not performed, and the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is not performed. It may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, and performs a pre-reading effect when a win is made, but does not perform a pre-reading effect when a failure is selected. Note that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the effect display inhibition effect C of the effect mode shown in FIG. 97 (G) to FIG. 97 (I), based on the arrival of the next period in which the effect of the hold sequence as a special image is performed (predetermined condition is satisfied), the hold sequence is performed. Is performed, the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display unit). (Disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the production of the held series is performed (even if the predetermined condition is satisfied), the production of the held series is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection unit SEL (selected image) May be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the effect of the hold sequence. If the winning is performed, the effect of the hold sequence is performed. . It should be noted that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the effect of the hold sequence may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95 (H), the car images GYK imitating a car as a special image form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). When an effect of running all at once is developed (so-called “group notice” is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection unit SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. (Disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image, a cut-in notice (additional image) such as a full-length image of the character, a partially enlarged image of the character, a composite image of the character or the item, or a group image of a plurality of characters is provided. It may be an image inserted as an effect. When the eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the reach effect, the display of the eye-catching image as a special image is prioritized by setting the eye-catching image as a special image. Then, the selection unit SEL may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the character of the maker producing the gaming machine 1 is caused to appear on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of the maker is set as a special image, and the display of the character of the maker is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL displays the image display device. 7 may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
96 (G) to FIG. 96 (J), in the selection display inhibition effect B, if a prefetch effect is performed during the change in the decoration pattern during a specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change, the prefetch effect is performed. If it is before it is performed, the effect mode can be selected during the change, whereas if the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the change, and Even during the period (interval) from the time when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the held image 9A in which the effect is performed are stopped and displayed until the time when the next decorative symbol is started to change, the player is not affected. However, even if the user operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. However, the reserved image 9A on which the pre-reading effect has been performed moves to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, and the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect mode selection may not be performed only during the period until the final display is performed, and even if the pre-reading effect is performed during the change in the specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, the effect mode may be selected during a period in which the reserved image 9A on which the reading effect has been performed moves to the right side as the reserved digestion image 9C and the decoration symbol starts to change.

[Modification 4]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95 and the effect display inhibition effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96, since the effect mode already selected is continued in the interval, the change of the next decorative pattern is started. Unless otherwise, the selection of the production mode could not be performed. However, the selection of the effect mode may be performed only in the interval in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined effect among the plurality of types of reach effects, and then the variation symbol display is started. As the predetermined effects, there can be mentioned those having a high degree of expectation that a jackpot game (small jackpot effect) advantageous to the player will occur. The effect mode cannot be selected in the given interval.

[Modification 5]
97 (G) to 97 (I), in the selection display inhibition effect C, the first surface of the hold continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 faces forward (toward the player) and stops. When displayed, although the information cannot be conveyed to the type of winning, the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 includes the big hit. However, it was not possible to convey up to the number of jackpots in the suspension information corresponding to the four second special figure suspensions. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be transmitted to the suspension information corresponding to the four second special figure suspensions. For example, when there are three jackpots in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings, the first of the held consecutive images HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (on the player side). “+3” may be displayed on the right side of the surface, or the three consecutive, three vertically or three obliquely arranged three consecutive HRC images having the first character body HRC1 may be displayed. Is also good.

[Modification 6]
In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode in FIG. 97, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such a moving image is a moving image that describes the flow of the effect of each mode, the characters, the background, the scene, and the like. The moving image may be a three-dimensional CG moving image, an animation moving image, or a movie. It may be one scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modification 7]
In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode of FIG. 97, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes from the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed as an image. The first effect displayed on the device 7 (display means) has been executed during the big hit effect (hit game effect). However, the selection unit SEL (selected image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during an effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect (or during an effect in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect). It may be. In this case, the second effect for displaying the effect of the hold sequence as a special image on the image display device 7 (display means) is also performed during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect (or in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect). (During an effect in a winning game).

[Modification 8]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95, the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96, and the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode of FIG. Then, other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying various images,
A first effect of displaying on the display means a selection image from which one of the effect modes can be selected,
And at least one of a second effect of displaying a special image on the display means,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, display of the selected image on the display unit in the first effect is prevented, and display of the special image on the display unit in the second effect is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The first effect and the second effect are executable in a specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C2-1 or Aspect C2-2,
A plurality of operation means that can be operated by a player,
One of the plurality of effect modes can be selected only when a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of a plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one effect mode to be selected is arranged on the front side.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
The predetermined condition includes a condition indicating a degree of expectation of occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to a player,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The game ball image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This game ball image effect can be executed during a change effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the game ball image effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the main image. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Gaming ball image effect A]
FIG. 98 is a view for explaining the game ball image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increasing. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface is green.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is over winning. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the green upper surface has become red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), a press-promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, a button image BG in which the color of the upper surface has changed in the color change effect is displayed. Further, a message image MG “press” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Gaming ball image effect B]
FIG. 99 is a view for explaining the game ball image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increasing. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable role 14 (the left movable role 14L) is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the light emission mode of the first movable role object 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the LED is lit in green.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is over winning. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable role (the left movable role 14L) is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the light emission mode of the first movable role object 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Gaming ball image effect C]
FIG. 100 is a view for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), a reserved stock effect is executed. The reserved stock effect is an effect in which the number of stored second special figure reservations is set to the maximum “4” in the fluctuation. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG indicating "Right-click and store on hold" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increasing. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. The panel image PG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the character of the panel image PG. Here, the character “CHANCE” is changed to “BIG CHANCE”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is over winning. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the panel image PG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the character of the panel image PG. Here, the character of "BIG CHANCE" has been changed to "Super Atsu".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), a battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a jackpot determined background.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number to form a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effects of the game ball image effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect using the game ball image UG is executed (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), and the jackpot. This indicates the degree of expectation of the transition to the game (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the attraction of the game can be improved by the effect using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG is caused to collide with the collision target (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)) and the collision target By changing the color of the game, the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game is suggested (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the effect of the color change due to the collision of the game ball image UG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG (FIG. 98) imitating the effect button 63 and a panel image PG displaying characters are adopted as collision targets of the game ball images UG (FIG. 100). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a uniform feeling on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (the left movable accessory 14L) is employed as a collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). According to this configuration, a dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98 (C) and (E)). 99 (C) (E) and 100 (B) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if a game ball collision effect was executed by the entered game ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the game ball image effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, one game ball is displayed in the game ball image UG, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of the game ball entering the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing irrelevant to the game ball entering the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of the game ball entering the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of the over prize after the second special figure reservation reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
Although the above is an example that suggests the expected degree of transition to the jackpot, it may be applied as an effect that suggests the expected degree of transition to the highly accurate or low-accuracy time-saving game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image that is an image imitating a game ball, and to indicate a degree of expectation of a shift to an advantageous game advantageous to the player,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C3-1,
In the game ball effect, the game ball image collides with the collision target, by changing the display color or color development mode of the collision target, suggesting the expected degree of transition to the advantageous game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C3-1 or Aspect C3-2,
The collision target is an image displayed on a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
The collision target is an accessory arranged in the game area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
The game ball effect is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The advantageous game is a time reduction game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The predetermined entrance is a starting port, which is executed upon entry of the ball into the starting port after the hold storage by entering the game ball into the starting port reaches the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the specific end face effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are also viewed in the drawings. Some of them are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing. There are things that are.

  The specific end face effect of the three-dimensional image can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end surface effect of the stereoscopic image, the image control microcomputer 101 responds from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable role 15 are included. Change aspects.

  Here, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described first, and then the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Specific edge effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram for describing a specific end face effect A of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effect. is there. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image.

  In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 101A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, a three-dimensional image In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7R of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “9”). The design 8C is variably displayed and a reach is formed.

  When the reach is formed, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image temporarily stops at the number “8”, and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image rotates by the number “8” (for example, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image). If the display mode is set such that the display mode gradually decreases toward the rear while rotating backward and upward from the upper side to the lower side, then another rotation (for example, from the right side to the left side of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image) The left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 101 (C). And the right decorative symbol 8R is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, and the rotation is stopped. As described later, this is performed in order to largely display the double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left middle decorative design 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative design 8CR obtained by dividing the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image into right and left.

  Thereafter, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided into right and left by a vertical line (center line) passing through the upper middle point and the lower middle point of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left middle decorative pattern of the three-dimensional image is formed. As shown in FIG. 101 (D), the right side of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR open in a double-opening manner. Here, the right end face of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL is a specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, which is a three-dimensional image having an open end face, and the left end face of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR is an open side end face. Is the specific end face 8CRa of the right side middle decorative pattern 8CR.

  The middle decorative pattern 8C is formed as colored and opaque. However, in a display mode in which the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-split manner, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right side The specific end face 8CRa of the middle decorative pattern 8CR is represented in a mode having transparency. Here, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative symbol 8CR are transparent areas.

  In a display mode in which the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-split manner, a predetermined image that should not be present in the background image is displayed on the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the specific end face 8CRa of the middle decorative pattern 8CR and the transparent area.

  Here, two character bodies CRA and CRB are used as the “predetermined image”, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Yes, even if the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-opened manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size of each other do not change. Has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative design 8CR.

  When the left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR are opened shortly in a double-leafed manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL and the transparent end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative design 8CR. Area is small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are transparent. As the 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-opening manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR increase. A part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, and the specific end face of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR can be seen. It is possible to visually recognize a portion of the character body CRA from CRa.

  When the left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR are widely opened in a double-split manner, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL becomes the character body CRB. And the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR increases until the presence of the character CRA can be visually recognized.

  Following FIG. 101 (E), as shown in FIG. 101 (F), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent form of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are displayed. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”). And a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is indicated by the number “9”, When the middle decorative pattern 8C is a numeral “8” and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral “9” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”) is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the loss is definitely displayed. Become.

[Specific end surface effect B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram for describing the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image. The specific end-face effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from among a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. is there. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end surface effect B of the stereoscopic image.

  In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a stereoscopic image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7R of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “9”). The design 8C is variably displayed and a reach is formed.

  When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). From the stationary state to advance (move) downward to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (effect position)). When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle from the horizontal state to the clockwise direction is completed. (E.g., 30 degrees), then stop and tilt.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), a character string “OARO” written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the form of a colored and opaque “OARO”. This is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as “OARO” described on the front surface of the second movable role object 15, or the appearance may be the same and the color may be different.

  Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role object 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position).

  The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character image LG of the stereoscopic image) and moves backward. If the display mode is set to gradually decrease with distance, the rotation is switched to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the three-dimensional image), and gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102 (E), the rotation is stopped because the size becomes larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appears in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a display mode. As will be described later, this is performed to largely display the double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into right and left.

  Then, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into right and left, and is divided into two stereoscopic character string images in which “OA” is the left character string image LGL and “RO” is the right character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the right side of the left-side character string image LGL and the left side of the right-side character string image LGR are in a display mode in which they are opened in a double-door mode. Here, the right end face of the character "A" which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL becomes the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image which becomes the open end face, and the left end of the right character string image LGR. The left end face of the character “R” serving as the end face becomes the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR that is a stereoscopic image serving as the open end face.

  The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque. However, when the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are displayed in a double-opening manner, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side are displayed. The specific end surface LGRa of the character string image LGR is represented in a mode having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent areas.

  In a display mode in which the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-split manner, a predetermined image that should not be present in the background image is displayed on the right side of the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL. The character string image LGR can be visually recognized through the specific end face LGRa and the transparent region.

  Here, two character bodies CRA and CRB are used as the “predetermined image”, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in the double-sided opening mode, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size between them do not change. Has become. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

  When the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are just opened in the double-sided opening mode, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparency of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR. Area is small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent. As the LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in the double-sided opening mode, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR become larger. A part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the specific end face of the right character string image LGR can be recognized. It is possible to visually recognize a portion of the character body CRA from GRa.

  When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are widely opened in the double-sided opening mode, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes the character body CRB. And the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR increases to a state where the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

  102 (G), as shown in FIG. 102 (H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent body of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”). And a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is indicated by the number “9”, When the middle decorative pattern 8C is a numeral “8” and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral “9” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”) is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the loss is definitely displayed. Become.

[Specific end surface effect C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from among a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end surface effect C of the stereoscopic image.

  In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 103A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a stereoscopic image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7R of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started, the stopped and displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are tentatively stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily halted with the numeral “9”). The design 8C is variably displayed and a reach is formed.

  When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). From the stationary state to advance (move) downward to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (effect position)). When the second movable accessory 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle from the horizontal state to the clockwise direction is completed. (E.g., 30 degrees), then stop and tilt.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), a character string “OARO” written on the front surface of the second movable role 15 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the form of a colored and opaque “OARO”. This is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as “OARO” described on the front surface of the second movable role object 15, or the appearance may be the same and the color may be different.

  Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role object 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position).

  The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character image LG of the stereoscopic image) and moves backward. If the display mode is set to gradually decrease with distance, the rotation is switched to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the three-dimensional image), and gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103 (E), the rotation is stopped because the size becomes larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appears in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a display mode. This is because, as will be described later, a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into the left and right and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other is greatly displayed. Done in

  Then, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into right and left, and is divided into two stereoscopic character string images in which “OA” is a left character string image LGL and “RO” is a right character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the left side of the left-side character string image LGL has a display mode in which the left side of the left-side character string image LGL rotates forward around the right vertical direction as an axis, and the right side of the right-side character string image LGR is the right side. This is a display mode in which the character string image LGR rotates forward with the left vertical direction as an axis. Here, the surface described as “OA” of the left character string image LGL immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103E) is divided into “left character string image”. The front surface of the right character string image LGR, which is called “front of the image LGL” and is immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103 (E)), is divided. , "The front side of the right character string image LGR".

  As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the left character string image LGL and the right character are overlapped so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap. This is a display mode in which the column image LGR rotates (hereinafter, referred to as a “display mode in which the front side of the left character string image LGL and the front side of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other).

  Thus, the right end face of the character “A”, which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, is the closed end face, and the left end face of the character “O”, the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is the open end face. Further, the left end face of the character “R”, which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR, is the closed end face, and the right end face of the character “O”, which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR, is the open end face.

  The left end face of the character "O" which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL is an open end face, which in this case becomes a specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image, and the right end of the right character string image LGR. The right end face of the character “O” serving as the right end face is an open end face, and here is a specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image.

  The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque. However, in a display mode in which the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other, the left character string image LGL is specified. The end face LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR are expressed in a mode having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent areas.

  In a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other, a predetermined image that should not be present in the background image is transparent to the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL. And the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR.

  Here, two character bodies CRA and CRB are used as the “predetermined image”, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images facing each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Yes, even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the display mode is closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, The positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size between them do not change. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

  When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are shortly closed so that the display mode is closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are small. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL is closed. When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR become large, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large. Can visually recognize the portion of Luo character body CRB, it is possible to visually recognize a portion of the character body CRA from a particular end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

  When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed until the display mode is closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, FIG. As shown in the figure, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large until the presence of the character body CRB can be visually recognized, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. Becomes large until the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 103B, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (I), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the transparent body of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”). And a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is indicated by the number “9”, When the middle decorative pattern 8C is a numeral “8” and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral “9” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”) is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the loss is definitely displayed. Become.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images. When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image on the image display device 7 (display means), the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specified end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR into which the three-dimensional image middle decorative pattern 8C is divided are shown in a mode having transparency, and the left middle Through the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR, it is possible to execute a first effect in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized. According to this configuration, the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are passed through the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative design 8CR, which are expressed in a transparent manner. Since an unprecedented novel effect of being visually recognizable can be provided, the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. In the specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the specific end faces LGLa of the left character string image LGL The two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the right character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the first effect is expressed in a mode having transparency. The middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided such that the area between the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR shown in a transparent manner is large. The left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR open (rotate) in a double-split manner. According to this configuration, the left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR are opened (rotated) in a double-sided manner, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL represented in a transparent manner. And the area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR represented in a mode having transparency is increased, and the area in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized is increased. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR open (rotate) in a double-sided opening mode, so that they have transparency. The area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL shown in the aspect and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR shown in the transparent mode becomes large, and the two character bodies CRA, The region where the CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be enlarged, which is also the same.
In the specific end effect C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are in front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR. Are rotated to a display mode that is closed so as to face each other, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left inner decorative pattern 8CL represented in a transparent mode and the right inner decorative pattern illustrated in a transparent mode. The area of the specific end face 8CRa of the symbol 8CR is enlarged, and the area where the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be enlarged.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, before the first effect, the number “8” which is the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image. The second effect of increasing the size of the image on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed. According to this configuration, before the first effect, the size of the numeral “8”, which is the medium decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a large size, so that the decorative pattern 8CL is displayed. The specific end face 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR before and after the specific end face 8CLa of the right decorative pattern 8CR and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are expressed in a mode having transparency. , It is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.
In the specific end-face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102 (E), before the first effect, the aspect of the double-sided opening by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR is largely increased by the image display device 7 ( Display means), the specific end face of the left character string image LGL before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are expressed in a transparent manner. This can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR, and similarly.
In the specific end-face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103 (E), before the first effect, the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other is greatly increased. Since the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the left and right character strings are displayed before and after the transmissive mode. This can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to the specific end face LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and similarly.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image, in the second effect, the number “8” which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is: By moving away in the depth direction, the size of the figure "8", which is the medium decoration pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed in a small size. The size of “8” is displayed large. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a large double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest is improved. Can be achieved.
In the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102 (E), the double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed in a large manner.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103 (E), a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other can be largely displayed, and the same is true. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is on the left side. A specific end face 8CLa of the divided left middle decorative pattern 8CL and a specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are divided into a plurality of middle decorative patterns 8CL and right middle decorative patterns 8CR. An effect can be executed in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end face). According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the middle decorative pattern 8C into a plurality of stereoscopic images, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increases. The player can be given many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end face in the image, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and enjoyed. Improvement can be achieved.
In the specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (E) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (E) to 103 (G), the character string image LG indicates “OA”. Since the left character string image LGL and “RO” are divided into two character string images having the right character string image LGR, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increases. The same applies because the player can be provided with many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end face in each of the three-dimensional images thus increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (D) of the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image, advance in the front (front) of the image display device 7 (display means). A movable member 15 (movable member) that is movable to a position (predetermined position), and when the second movable member 15 (movable member) forms a reach during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern, When a reach effect including a specific end surface effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among a plurality of types of reach effects, a third effect that operates (at a predetermined timing) and moves to an advanced position (a predetermined position) can be executed. In the second effect, the character string image “OARO” written on the front surface of the second movable role object 15 (movable member) is displayed as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image “OARO”. Has become. According to this configuration, when the second movable role 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advance position (predetermined position), this triggers the second movable role 15 (movable member). Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image called "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable role 15 (movable). The character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the (member) is as if the character string "OARO" was swung down from the second movable role 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means). Since a novel effect can be performed, the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (D).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are transparent areas, and the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions. However, specific end faces 8CLa and 8CRa in specific end face effects A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end faces LGLa and LGRa in specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and specific end faces LGLa in specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. , LGRa only need to have translucency, and may have translucency such as frosted glass. In this case, for example, the specific end surface is represented by a mode having a light-transmitting property such as frosted glass, and from a blurred mode in which the predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the specific end surface, the specific end surface is gradually changed to a transparent region. As the transparency increases, the predetermined image may be easily viewed through the specific end face. Even with such a configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 103, two character bodies CRA as a predetermined image are passed through the specific end face of the three-dimensional image. , CRB, and was a still image in which two character bodies CRA, CRB faced each other with a sword. However, a moving image may be used instead of a still image. The moving image may be, for example, a description of a flow until two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other with a sword, a moving image by three-dimensional CG, a moving image by animation, or a moving image of a movie. It may be one scene.

[Modification 3]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 103, the three-dimensional image is divided into two three-dimensional images. However, the image may be divided into three or more three-dimensional images. In this case, the number of the stereoscopic images increases due to the division, so that the specific end face in each stereoscopic image also increases, and as a result, there are many opportunities to visually recognize the predetermined image through the transparent specific end face. It can be given to a player.

[Modification 4]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-sided manner, and in the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. A display mode in which the character string image LGR is gradually opened in the double-sided opening mode and the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other in the specific end effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. Thus, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually closed. However, the stereoscopic images may be rotated in the same direction or in mutually different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are rotated in the same direction without the double-sided opening mode (for example, a right rotating mode, a left rotating mode, Forward rotation, backward rotation, etc.), or rotation in different directions, for example, the left middle decorative pattern 8CL is rotated forward while the right middle decorative pattern 8CR is rotated backward. Or the mode in which the left middle decorative pattern 8CL is rotated backward, while the mode in which the right middle decorative pattern 8CR is rotated clockwise. In the specific end-face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, right-handed rotation, left-handed rotation, Forward rotation, backward rotation, etc.), or rotation in different directions, for example, the left character string image LGL is rotated forward, while the right character string image LGR is rotated backward. Or the right character string image LGR is rotated rightward while the left character string image LGL is rotated backward. In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction without setting the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR to be closed. (E.g., a right-rotating mode, a left-rotating mode, a forward-rotating mode, a backward-rotating mode, etc.), or a mode in which the left character string image LGL is rotated forward in different directions. In contrast, the right character string image LGR may be rotated backward, or the left character string image LGR may be rotated backward, whereas the right character string image LGR may be rotated right.

[Modification 5]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 103, an effect by the gaming machine 1 as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the three-dimensional image. It showed the worldview of the world. However, it may indicate a development destination of the reach production. Since there are multiple types of reach production development destinations, the development destination visible through the specific end face can indicate to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur, and the jackpot at the predetermined image and the development destination It is also possible to contribute to finding the relevance with the degree of expectation that the game will occur by the player himself.

[Modification 6]
The specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 103 show the world view of the effect by the gaming machine 1 as a predetermined image. there were. As an indication of the world view of the production, for example, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB having swords, items such as swords and shields, vehicles, and two character bodies may be used. A character that can be represented by two Chinese characters such as a character “crash” indicating an action by CRA or CRB, a character “ranbu”, a character “musou” or the like may be used.

[Modification 7]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 103, some of the effects described above may not be provided. The effect of may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a stereoscopic image on the display means, the specific end face in the stereoscopic image is represented in a mode having transparency, and a first effect in which a predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end face can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, the three-dimensional image is rotated so that the area of the specific end face becomes larger.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-1 or Aspect D1-2,
Before the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of increasing the size of the stereoscopic image on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, after the stereoscopic image is displayed in a small size by moving away in the depth direction, the size of the stereoscopic image is increased by approaching in the front direction. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
In the first effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the three-dimensional image is divided into a plurality of pieces, and the predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end surface in each of the divided three-dimensional images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-3 or Aspect D1-4,
A movable member movable to a predetermined position on the front surface of the display means,
A third effect in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position can be executed,
In the second effect, the three-dimensional image in which the movable member is three-dimensionally displayed is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Hereinafter, the combined effects A to C of the movable characters will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. 104 to 106, decorative symbols and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Some of the second movable roles 15 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  The combined effect of the movable characters can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). In other words, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a combined effect of the movable characters, the image control microcomputer 101 responds from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a combined effect of movable movable objects, the game board 2 The position, the inclination and the light emitting mode of the left movable auditory piece 14L and the right movable auditory piece 14R of the first movable auditory provided are changed, and the position, the tilt and the light emitting mode of the second movable auditory 15 provided on the game board 2 are changed. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 disposed around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter, “light emission of the frame lamp 66”) Or "aspect").

  The left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 is provided with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor (a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided), and the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L may be a multicolor emission mode. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted (provided in plurality) on the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14, and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R may be a multicolor emission mode. it can. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted on the second movable role 15 (a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided), and the light emission mode of the second movable role 15 can be a multi-color emission mode. Each of the frame lamps 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are provided with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided). The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor emission mode.

  Here, the combined effect A of the movable role will be described first, and the combined effect B of the movable role and the combined effect C of the movable role will be described in order.

[Combined production of movable characters A]
First, the combined effect A of the movable characters will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect A of the movable characters. As shown in FIG. 104 (A), first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the combined effect A of the movable auditoriums is such that the left movable auditorium 14L is in the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium, and the retreat position (home) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Position) to the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R is illuminated for the right movable role (light emission for the left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the mode), the image display device 7 advances (moves) from the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a to the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emission mode for the right movable auditory which is exactly the same as the light emission aspect of the right movable accessory 14R. Is different.

  The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction approaching each other), and FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left-side decorative portion, which is half, and the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the right-side movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left-side decorative portion and right-side movable portion of the left-side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined role) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the role 14R is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are combined to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “circular region”.) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, the image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and thereafter, the image is switched to the image in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (C) and FIG. 104 (D), the united character leans from the upper side to the lower side toward the near side (the player side), and returns to the “nod (person) 'S face is bowed)). At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image expressing the emotion in accordance with the operation in which the combined role is inclined toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original state is also displayed. This is a display mode in which the facial expression of the united character is changed three-dimensionally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is stopped at the retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it is stopped. At this time, the second movable role 15 has a configuration in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R that are united are advanced forward, so that the upper side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are formed. The upper part is covered. The second movable role 15 may be configured to cover one of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R (particular movable member).

  When the second movable role 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable role to a light emitting mode for turning off the light, and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the frame lamp 66 are controlled. Is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium) to the light emitting mode for turning off the light. On the other hand, when the second movable role 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is controlled to the second movable role light emitting mode. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled again from the light emitting mode for extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium, and the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R and the frame lamp. The light emission mode of 66 is controlled again from the light emission mode that is turned off to the light emission mode for the right movable auditorium (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable auditorium). That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable role, the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are a light emitting mode for the right movable role, and the second movable role is provided. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 is the light emitting mode for the second movable role, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R). The light emission mode of the second movable role 15 is different from the light emission mode of the second movable role 15.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable role emission mode and stops to return to the original horizontal position. When the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable role. The light emitting mode is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to a light emitting mode for turning off the light.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable role, and the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the center advance position to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R emits light for the right movable role (left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the object), the image display device 7 is retracted from the front (front) center advanced position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home position). Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 in an emission position for the left movable accessory from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the left movable auditory piece 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium to the light emitting mode for extinguishing the light, and the light movable aspect is moved to the right. In the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), the accessory 14R is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. When the retreat (movement) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is changed to the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium). ) It is controlled to a light emission mode to turn off the. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R, and is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium). Is controlled.

  As described above, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that the right movable movable object 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable movable object 14R advances toward the advanced position to retreat to return to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position and retreats to return to the home position). The light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  In addition, the light emission mode of the second movable role 15 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable role 15 defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the left movable role 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data, and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R advances according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable role 14R defined in time series. Proceeds in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 specified in a time series. The light emitting pattern data for the right movable role 14R and the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emitting pattern data.

  The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position to retreat and returns to the home position), Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable role 14R when the right movable role 14R is operated. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R may be made to proceed in accordance with the respective light emission pattern data by individually storing the data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed in accordance with the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters B]
Next, the combined effect A of movable movable objects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect B of the movable characters. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the left movable movable object 14 </ b> L is in the left movable auditory emission mode, and the left retreat position (the home position) of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. From the position) to the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode in which the right movable role 14R is turned off. From the evacuation position (home position) on the right side, the vehicle advances (moves) toward the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emitting mode that is turned off, which is the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R. Is different.

  The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction approaching each other), and FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative portion, which is half, and the right decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the right movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left decorative portion and the right movable portion of the left movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined role) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the role 14R is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are combined to form a combined role having an annular shape, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is changed to the left movable role. The light emission mode is controlled from the light emission mode to the light emission mode in which the light is turned off, and the region formed in the ring becomes a region having a circular shape (hereinafter, referred to as a “circular region”) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, the image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and thereafter, the image is switched to the image in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is stopped at the retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it is stopped. At this time, the second movable role 15 has a configuration in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R that are united are advanced forward, so that the upper side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are formed. The upper part is covered. The second movable role 15 may be configured to cover one of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R (particular movable member).

  When the second movable role 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L maintains the light emitting mode of turning off, and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are turned off. Is maintained. On the other hand, when the second movable role 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is controlled to the second movable role light emitting mode. The light emitting mode for the second movable role is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable role, and is different from the light emitting mode for the right movable role described later (the light emitting mode for the left movable role and the light emitting mode for the second movable role). The light emission mode is different from that of the embodiment mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (D) and FIG. 105 (E), the light emission mode of the left movable auditory piece 14L is controlled from the light emission mode of turning off to the light emission mode for the left movable auditorium again, as shown in FIGS. The light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is controlled from the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off to the right movable auditorium light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory of the right movable accessory 14R. The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable role, the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are a light emitting mode for the right movable role, and the second movable role is provided. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 is the light emitting mode for the second movable role, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R). The light emission mode of the second movable role 15 is different from the light emission mode of the second movable role 15.

  Then, the united character performs a "nod (like a person's face bowing)" action of inclining from the upper side to the lower side toward the near side (the player side) and returning to the original side. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image expressing the emotion in accordance with the operation in which the combined role is inclined toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original state is also displayed. This is a display mode in which the facial expression of the united character is changed three-dimensionally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable role emission mode, and stops to return to the original horizontal position. When the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable role. The light emitting mode is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to a light emitting mode for turning off the light.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is in a light emitting mode for the left movable role, and the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the center advance position to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R emits light for the right movable role (left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the object), the image display device 7 is retracted from the front (front) center advanced position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home position). Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the left movable accessory 14 </ b> L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory light emission mode. When the retreat (movement) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the left movable auditory piece 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium to the light emitting mode for extinguishing the light, and the light movable aspect is moved to the right. In the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory), the accessory 14R advances in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) from the position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is changed to the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (the left movable auditorium). It is controlled to a light emission mode to turn off a light emitting mode and the second movable won game for lighting mode different lighting mode). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (the light emission mode for the left movable accessory and the light emission mode for the second movable accessory). It is controlled from a different light emission mode) to a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.

  In this manner, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position and retreats to return to the home position). The light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  In addition, the light emission mode of the second movable role 15 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable role 15 defined in time series, and the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern data for the left movable role 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data, and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R advances according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable role 14R defined in time series. Proceeds in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 specified in a time series. The light emitting pattern data for the right movable role 14R and the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emitting pattern data.

  The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position to retreat and returns to the home position), Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable role 14R when the right movable role 14R is operated. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R may be made to proceed in accordance with the respective light emission pattern data by individually storing the data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed in accordance with the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters C]
Next, the combined effect C of the movable characters will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect C of the movable characters. As shown in FIG. 106 (A), first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the left movable movable object 14L is in the left movable auditory emission mode, and the left retractable position (home) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. Position) to the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R is illuminated for the right movable role (light emission for the left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the mode), the image display device 7 advances (moves) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a to the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emission mode for the right movable auditory which is exactly the same as the light emission aspect of the right movable accessory 14R. Is different.

  The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position (in the direction approaching each other) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left-side decorative portion, which is half, and the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the right-side movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left-side decorative portion and right-side movable portion of the left-side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined role) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of the role 14R is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are combined to form a combined role having an annular shape, a region formed in the annular shape has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “circular region”.) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, the image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and thereafter, the image is switched to the image in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (C) and FIG. 106 (D), the united character leans from the upper side toward the lower side toward the near side (the player side), and returns to the original “nod (person) 'S face is bowed)). At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image expressing the emotion in accordance with the operation in which the combined role is inclined toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original state is also displayed. This is a display mode in which the facial expression of the united character is changed three-dimensionally.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the left movable auditory 14L and the left movable auditorium 14R move in a direction in which the left movable auditorium 14R and the right movable auditorium 14R are separated from each other, and the image display device is in the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium. 7 moves backward from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable movable object 14R is movable to the right. Evacuation position on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the accessory (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory) Retreat (move) toward (home position). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the left movable accessory 14 </ b> L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the forward (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory light emission mode. When the retreat (movement) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the left movable auditory piece 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium to the light emitting mode for extinguishing the light, and the light movable aspect is moved to the right. In the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), the accessory 14R is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a. When the retreat (movement) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is changed to the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium). ) It is controlled to a light emission mode to turn off the. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R, and is turned off from the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium). Is controlled.

  In this manner, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position and retreats to return to the home position). The light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  The light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L proceeds in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the left movable role 14L defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R changes in the right movable mode defined in time series. The light progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in a time series. The light emitting pattern data for the right movable role 14R and the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emitting pattern data.

  The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position to retreat and returns to the home position), Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable role 14R when the right movable role 14R is operated. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R may be made to proceed in accordance with the respective light emission pattern data by individually storing the data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed in accordance with the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

  Further, in the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 104 and the combined effect B of the movable role in FIG. 105, the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is provided by the image display device 7. From the stationary state at the upper evacuation position (home position), advance (move) downward to a position (advance position (production position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the clock The second movable role 15 is stopped after rotating by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the direction, and then the second movable role 15 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable role light emission mode. ) To stop and return to the original horizontal state, and have retreated upward (moved) from the advanced position (directed position) to the retracted position (home position). In the union effect C, the second movable No effect of appearing to the front (anterior) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 according to the object 15. This is a degree of expectation that a jackpot game (small jackpot effect) will occur when executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation) as the degree of expectation of the movable role in FIG. This is because the combined effect A is set highest, followed by the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106 is set to the lowest.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined effect of the movable characters.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable characters, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (multiple LEDs) A front frame 53 provided with an LED that can emit color light) and a game board 2 provided with a game area 3 visually recognized through an opening formed in the front frame 53, and various images can be displayed. A displayable image display device 7 (display means), and a left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 which is movable to a traveling position (predetermined position) in front of the image display device 7 (display means) and is united therewith. And a right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are provided on the game board 2, and a left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and a right side of the first movable role 14. The movable role 14R (the plurality of movable members) includes a plurality of LEDs (the second Light means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are provided, and the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are combined. Then, of the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14, the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 (a specific one). The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on a movable member) and a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs) provided on the front frame 53 (LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is the same as the light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 move to the advanced position and can be combined. Thereby, the player can be visually enjoyed, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emission) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (the first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are the same. It can be visually entertained and can enhance the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104A to 104H of the combined effect A of the movable auditors, the left movable auditorium 14L and the first movable auditorium 14 of the first movable auditory 14 When the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable role 14 is united, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (the plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are combined. ), A plurality of LEDs (a movable member other than the right movable member 14R (a specific movable member) of the first movable member 14 except for the right movable member 14R) of the first movable member 14 are provided. Second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and frame lamp 66 provided in front frame 53 (first light emitting means: plural LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) Is different from the light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (the plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are moved to the advanced position and merged. This allows the player to visually enjoy, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: emits multicolor light) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) on the right side of the first movable member 14. Of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14. With the light emitting mode, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of the combined effect A of the movable auditors, the left movable auditorium 14L and the first movable auditorium 14 of the first movable auditory 14 A part of the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and the left side of the first movable role 14 without being combined with the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable role 14. A second movable role 15 (non-coalescing movable member) that is movable to cover one or both of a part of the movable role 14L (another movable member) is provided. According to this configuration, the second movable role is newly provided separately from the left movable role 14L of the combined first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14. Since the object 15 (non-coalescing movable member) appears and does not unite with the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable role 14, the game is performed. It is possible to visually entertain and improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of movable movable objects in FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of the combined effect A of movable movable objects, a plurality of movable movable members 15 (non-integrated movable members) An LED (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is provided, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: multicolor light emission) provided on the second movable role object 15 (non-coalesced movable member) are provided. When the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are united, the first movable role can be changed. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multi-colored) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) of the object 14 and the left movable member 14L (other movable member) of the first movable member 14, respectively. LED that can emit light) and provided on the front frame 53 A frame lamp 66: have become so different lighting mode to the lighting mode (first light emitting means multiple LED (LED) capable of multi-color light emission). According to this configuration, the second movable role is newly provided separately from the left movable role 14L of the combined first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14. The object 15 (non-coalescing movable member) appears, and the plurality of LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the second movable auditors 15 (non-coalescing movable member). The aspect is a plurality of LEDs (second movable members) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable member 14 and the left movable member 14L (other movable member) of the first movable member 14, respectively. (2) Light emitting mode of light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided in front frame 53 Since the light emission mode is different from the light emission mode, the player It is possible to visually entertaining, it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of movable movable objects in FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable characters, the frame lamp 66 (first light emission) provided on the front frame 53 is provided. Means), a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) and a second movable role 15 provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14. The provided plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) are LEDs (light emitting means) capable of emitting multicolor light. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are provided. The plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided and the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable role 15 can emit multicolor light, so that the player can visually recognize the player. It can be entertained and enhance the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable auditorium, the jackpot game state (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player is provided. Before displaying the occurrence on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation)), the left side of the first movable auditorium 14. The movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, before the occurrence of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation)). The left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are moved to the advanced position to form a united state, thereby impacting the player. It is possible to provide a dramatic effect and to visually entertain the player, thereby improving the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable auditoriums, the jackpot game state (big hit effect) in which the player is provided with a profit is provided. During the period from the occurrence to the end (that is, during the jackpot effect), the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (the plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are moved. It can be combined. According to this configuration, during the period from the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (big hit effect) to the end (during the big hit effect), the left movable role 14L and the first movable role 14 of the first movable role 14 are formed. The right movable object 14R (a plurality of movable members) moves to the advanced position to form a combined form, so that it is possible to provide the player with a high-impact effect and visually enjoy the player. It is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the combined effect of the movable characters will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the combined effect A of the movable characters in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable characters in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable characters in FIG. 106, the left movable member 14L and the first movable member of the first movable member 14 are shown. The right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the role 14 was moved to the advanced position and united. However, any one or all of the movable members of the left movable member 14L of the first movable member 14 and the right movable member 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable member 14 move to the advanced position. The player may return to the evacuation position (home position) on the way to move to the advance position again, or may reciprocate between the evacuation position (home position) and the advance position, thereby performing a merging effect of a movable character that does not merge as a result. . Also in this case, the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs that can emit multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and The light emitting mode by the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor)) is the same as the light emitting mode, and the right movable role 14R (the specific A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on the movable member) and a plurality of LEDs provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 ( The second light-emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) has a different light-emitting mode. Further, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and as a result, When the second movable role 15 (non-coalescing movable member) newly appears during the union effect of the movable roles that do not unite with the second mobile role, the second movable role 15 (non-coalescing movable member) The light emitting mode of the plurality of provided LEDs (third light emitting means: an LED that can emit multicolor light) includes a right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and a first movable role. The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable role 14L (other movable member) of the object 14 and the frame provided on the front frame 53 Lamp 66 (first light emitting means: plural LEDs ( The different lighting mode to the lighting mode of the LED)) which can be color emission.

[Modification 2]
In the combined effect A of the movable characters in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable characters in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable characters in FIG. 106, the left movable member 14L and the first movable member of the first movable member 14 are shown. In this mode, two movable roles, the right movable role 14R of the role 14, are moved to the advanced position and united. However, a mode may be adopted in which three or more movable members move to the advance positions and unite. In this case, the first movable auditors 14 as the specific movable auditors having the same light emitting aspect as the light emitting aspect of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)). It may be the right movable role 14R, may be replaced with another movable role different from the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14, or a movable role selected from all the movable roles. It may be a thing.

[Modification 3]
The left movable member 14L and the first movable member 14 of the first movable member 14 that operate in the combined effect A of the movable members in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable members in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable members in FIG. When the right movable member 14R of the movable member 14 is located (standby) at the retracted position (home position), the left decorative member concealing the existence of the left movable member 14L and the presence of the right movable member 14R are determined. Even if the right decorative member to be hidden and the game board 2 are provided, the left decorative member is provided with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and the right decorative member is provided with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Good. In this case, when the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are respectively located (standby) at the retracted position (home position), the first movable role is set. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable role 14L of the object 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are turned off. Even so, the light emission effect of the left decorative member and the right decorative member can be performed by the light emission of the plurality of full-color LEDs respectively mounted on the left decorative member and the right decorative member. For example, the same light emission mode is used for the light emitting mode of the left decorative member and the light emitting mode of one or both decorative members of the right decorative member, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light emitting mode of the second movable member 15. It can be an aspect.

[Modification 4]
In the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable role in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIG. 106, the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 (specific movable position). The light-emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) provided on a member) and a frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (multicolor light emission can be performed) LED)) was the same as the light emission mode. However, the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable movable object 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable auditorium 14 and the front frame 53 The frame lamp 66 arranged on the left side of the opening has the same light-emission mode, whereas the plurality of frames provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable member 14 have the same light emission mode. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is different from the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53. Alternatively, the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and Frame lamp 6 arranged around the left side of the opening of frame 53 Are different from each other in the light emitting mode, a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14. (A possible LED) and a frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 may have the same light emission mode.

[Modification 5]
In the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable role in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIG. 106, a ring-shaped decoration attached to the distal end side of the left movable role 14L. The left decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip end of the right movable accessory 14R, are united to form the left decorative part of the left movable auditorium 14L. When one decorative member (combined role) having a ring shape with the right decorative portion of the right movable movable object 14R is formed, the combined role moves from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side). He was performing a “nod (like a person's face bowing)” motion, tilting and returning. However, the united character may perform a “turning the human face left and right” operation of rotating and moving the left side and the right side toward the near side (the player side) and returning to the original side. . In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as an image expressing the emotion, an image in which the eyes are crossed (battens) (for example, see FIG. 54) is sad. It may be an image expressing emotion.

[Modification 6]
As a degree of expectation that a jackpot game (small jackpot effect) occurs when the decorative symbol is changed during the change effect (for example, a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol), the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 105, the combined effect B of the movable characters in FIG. 105 is set high, and the combined effect C of the movable characters in FIG. 106 is set the lowest. However, the combined effect A of the movable character in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106 are used in a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player. It may be performed as an effect. It may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 by the player, or may be executed based on the operation (pressing down) of the sword member 64 by the player, The execution may be performed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 by the player.

[Modification 7]
The light emitting mode for the left movable role of the left movable role 14L is completely different from the light emitting mode for the right movable role of the right movable role 14R, and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the right movable role. The light emitting mode for the right movable auditory is the same as the light emitting aspect of the object 14R, and is different from the light emitting aspect for the left movable auditory of the left movable auditory 14L. However, during a period from when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R operate to advance toward the advanced position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R. When the same light emission mode is used in conjunction with 14R, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is different from the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L. The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are linked to each other to have the same light emission mode, for example, illuminate red, blink, or illuminate in gradation, while the frame lamp 66 is turned off. Alternatively, the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or lighting in gradation.

[Modification 8]
In the combined effect A of the movable character in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106, some of the described effects may not be provided. The effect of may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A front frame in which the first light emitting means is provided;
Display means visually recognized through an opening formed in the front frame,
A plurality of movable members that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means and united,
The plurality of movable members are each provided with a second light emitting unit,
When the plurality of movable members are united, a light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit provided on a specific movable member of the plurality of movable members and a light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit provided on the front frame are provided. Have the same light emission mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members of the plurality of movable members except the specific movable member and the second light emitting unit provided on the front frame. A light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
A non-coalesced movable member movable so as to cover one or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member without being combined with the plurality of movable members,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
A third light emitting means is provided on the non-coalesced movable member;
The light-emitting mode of the third light-emitting means provided on the non-coalesced movable member may be such that, when the plurality of movable members are combined, the second light-emission provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member, respectively. A light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of the means and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means, and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of emitting multicolor light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
Before displaying the occurrence of the winning game effect on the display means, the plurality of movable members can be combined,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
During the period from the production of the hit game to the end thereof, the plurality of movable members can be combined,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variations]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than those described above may be included.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine, the gaming machine 1 may have another configuration. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a spinning type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine, instead of a pachinko gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is executed using the image representing the select button 68. The display effect may be executed, or a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment executes various effects using the image display device 7, as shown in FIGS. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more of the effect examples and / or modifications among the plurality of effect examples and / or modifications described above may be combined. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, at least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of an above-described aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. This aspect can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents are included in this aspect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (Hold icon)
9C: the reserved image (the reserved icon)
14: first movable role 15: second movable role 20: first starting port (first ball entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd entrance port)
66 ... frame lamp 81 ... microcomputer for game control 91 ... microcomputer for effect control 101 ... microcomputer for image control

Claims (6)

A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined operation times,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
If there is no notification of the winning even when the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, a loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
During the predetermined effect, does not perform a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
During the predetermined effect, there may be a case where a promotion effect for prompting the operation of the operation unit is performed, and a case where the promotion effect is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images